JP2016087407A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with a good operability.SOLUTION: A rubber band RB is provided so as to make a movement resistance variable when moving an oscillation operation member 13310 in a prescribed direction with respect to a lever member 18340, therefore an operation feeling of the oscillation operation member 13310 can be changed when the oscillation operation member 13310 is operated in the same direction. Accordingly, amusement of a player operating the oscillation operation member 13310 can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 102

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine including an operation member that moves between a first position and a second position by a manual operation by a player (Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-144218 A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the operability of the operation member.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with good operability of the operation member.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an operation member configured to be operable by a player, and a connection member that movably supports the operation member. And a variable means for varying the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the connection member is configured to be movable, and adjustment of movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing an arrangement of the connection member. .

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member and the operation member can be contacted. A wall member disposed at a position where the operating member is loaded in a first direction that is opposite to the urging direction of the urging member in a state where the connecting member is disposed at a predetermined position. The operation member is configured to be provided from the wall member and moved in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operability of the operation member can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the operability of the operation member can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the durability of the operation member can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line | wire of Fig.6 (a). (A) is the partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a). It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swinging member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (A) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the eccentric cam member taken along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a phase detection member, (b) is a bottom view of the phase detection member, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the phase detection member along line XVc-XVc in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a lever member, (b) is a side view of the lever member as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and (c) is an arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view of the lever member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of an operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device in the arrow XVIIb direction view of Fig.17 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XVIIIc-XVIIIc of FIG. It is the elements on larger scale of the swing operation member of Fig.18 (a). It is sectional drawing of the swing operation member in the XX-XX line of FIG.17 (b). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in 2nd Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) is a front view of the cam member of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the cam member as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a), and (c) is a view of the eccentric cam member. It is a front view of a main-body member, (d) is a side view of a main-body member in the arrow XXXd direction view of FIG.30 (c). (A) is a front view of an eccentric cam member, (b) is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the XXXIb direction view of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a front view of the eccentric cam member. . (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is FIG. 32 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the XXXIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIIIb direction view of FIG. 33 (a). (A) to (d) are front views of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) is a front view of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock member, and an unlock cam member. (A) to (c) is a front view of the main body member of the swing member illustrated in the axial view of the shaft support rod. (A) is a top view of a motor fixing plate, (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and (c) is shown in FIG. 37 (b). It is a side view of the motor fixing plate which shows the state by which the U-shaped member was slid from the state. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 3rd Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the XXXIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of a locking member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a lever member and a swing operation member. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) is a top view of the main body member and the lock receiving member of the lever member, and (b) and (c) are side views of the main body member of the lever member and the side of the lock receiving member in the LIIIb direction view of FIG. 53 (a). FIG. (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine and operation device which looked at the cross section by the VIb-VIb line | wire of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an inner case member in a 5th embodiment. (A) is a front view of the eccentric cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member in the LVIb direction view of FIG. 56 (a), and (c) is an LVIc of FIG. 56 (a). It is a side view of the eccentric cam member in the direction view. (A) is a front view of the unlocking cam member, (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member in the LVIIb direction view of FIG. 57 (a), and (c) is FIG. 57 (a). It is a side view of the lock release cam member in the LVIIc direction view. (A) is a front view of a lock member, (b) is a side view of the lock member in the LVIII direction view of FIG. 58 (a). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) to (b) is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlock cam member, and a lock member that represent operations of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. It is a schematic diagram of a lever member, an eccentric cam member, a lock release cam member, and a lock member. (A) And (b) is a lever member, an eccentric cam member, an unlocking cam member, and a locking member representing the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the unlocking cam member, and the locking member in the sixth embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member that represent the operation of the lever member, the eccentric cam member, the lock release cam member, and the lock member in time series. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in 7th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 8th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a side view of the operation device in 9th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operating device in 10th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in 11th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is the fragmentary sectional view of the swing operation member and lever member in 12th Embodiment in the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a swing operation member and a lever member. It is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member of a lever member, an upper cover member, a lower cover member, and a swinging member. It is a front exploded perspective view of a swing operation member. (A) is a bottom view of the front cover and the back cover, (b) is a bottom view of the front cover, the back cover and the separation prevention cover, and (c) is a line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc in FIG. 83 (b). It is sectional drawing of the front cover in FIG. (A) is a perspective view of a back side frame member, (b) is a back side frame member as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (viewed from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall). (C) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member taken along line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of the eaves member, (b) is a front view of the eaves member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is an arrow in FIG. 85 (a). It is a side view of the collar member in LXXXVc direction view, (d) is sectional drawing of the collar member in the LXXXVd-LXXXVd line | wire of FIG.85 (b). (A) is a front perspective view of a support member, (b) is a top view of the support member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a), and (c) is LXXXVIc in FIG. 86 (b). It is sectional drawing of the supporting member in the -LXXXVIc line. (A) is a partial top view of a back side frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is a back side view. It is a partial top view of a frame member and an attitude | position correction apparatus, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in the LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId line | wire of FIG. 87 (c), (e) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in the LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe line of 87 (d). (A) is a partial top view of a back side frame member and a posture correction apparatus, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the back side frame member and a posture correction apparatus in the LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 88 (a). (C) is a partial top view of a back side frame member and an attitude | position correction apparatus, (d) is a fragmentary sectional view of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in the LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId line of FIG.88 (c). FIG. 8E is a partial top view of the rear side frame member and the posture correcting device, and FIG. 8F is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member and the posture correcting device taken along line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf in FIG. It is. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) is a front view of the locking member in 14th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the locking member in the arrow LXXXIb direction view of Fig.91 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged view of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged view of an eccentric cam member and a posture switching device. (A) And (b) is a top view of the contact member in 15th Embodiment, (c) is a cross section of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in the line | wire corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line | wire of FIG. It is a figure and (d) is sectional drawing of the back side frame member and attitude | position correction apparatus in the LXXXXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId line of FIG.98 (c). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back frame member and the posture correcting device taken along the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line of FIG. 87, and (b) is the back side frame of the LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of a member and an attitude | position correction apparatus. (A) to (d) is a side view of the operating device in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 17th Embodiment in the line | wire corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A)-(c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 18th Embodiment in the line | wire corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 19th Embodiment in the line | wire corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 20th Embodiment in the line | wire corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). It is a rear view of the swing operation member in the arrow CV direction view of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operating device in 21st Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in 22nd Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line | wire of Fig.17 (a).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 27, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 that are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are tapped from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball launched to the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays the variation. For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or setting the second winning port 640 by “left-handed”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first For example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port (not shown). Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port. A pair of out ports are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing on the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 335 a and 337 a and a vibration device 366.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a swing operation member 310 that can be gripped and operated by a player. The swing operation member 310 includes an accommodation recess 17 a and a lower plate that are recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The region formed by the housing recess 15a that is recessed in the vertical direction at the central portion in the left-right direction of the unit 15 can be moved.

  There is a gap between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recesses 15a and 17a so that at least a finger of a hand can easily enter. Thereby, the player can hold the swinging operation member 310 in such a manner as to hold it from above. When the swinging operation member 310 is gripped from above, a finger placed between the swinging operation member 310 and the housing recess 17a is caught on the side surface on the back side of the swinging operation member 310, and the hand is in that state. Even if this force is removed and left to gravity, the hand is prevented from sliding off the swing operation member 310. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the burden of the player maintaining his / her hand on the swing operation device 310.

  Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it demonstrates on the assumption that a player operates the swing operation member 310 with a left hand.

  6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a). These are the partial front views of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line | wire of Fig.7 (a).

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. 6 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position (initial position in the present embodiment), and in FIG. 7, the swing operation member 310 is in the downward position (the depressed position in the present embodiment). ) Is illustrated, and a hand holding the swing operation member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The housing recess 15 a of the lower dish unit 15 and the housing recess 17 a of the upper dish 17 are arranged sufficiently apart from the outer shape of the swing operation member 310. Therefore, when a player holds the swing operation member 310 and performs a push-down operation, it is possible to prevent the finger from being pinched between the swing operation member 310 and the housing recess 15a and the housing recess 17a.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the player puts his / her finger on the intermediate frame member 312 and holds the swing operation member 310. In this state, the lens member 317 that also serves as a push button portion is disposed facing the palm, so that the player can perform an operation of pushing the vibration member 310 by grasping the swing operation member 310 while grasping it. Therefore, it is possible to push the lens member 317 while holding the swing operation member 310 without pressing the push button with a finger or holding the swing operation member 310 while holding the swing operation member 310. it can. Therefore, the operation can be simplified.

  The lens member 317 disposed on the swing operation member 310 is disposed at a position where it hits the palm when the player holds the swing operation member 310. Therefore, by detecting that the player is holding the swing operation member 310 and then vibrating the lens member 317, vibration can be transmitted to the player (such as his palm or finger). It is possible to prevent a situation where the person is not noticed. Therefore, the effect of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, by pushing the lens member 317 in accordance with the vibration, it is possible to produce an effect so that the timing of the input operation can be achieved, and the game is too concentrated on the timing of the input operation. The problem of being unable to concentrate can be solved.

  Since the lens member 317 is hidden inside the player's hand in a state where the player holds the swing operation member 310, whether the lens member 317 is vibrating (the lens member 317 is relative to the intermediate frame member 312). It is difficult for a player other than the player holding the swing operation member 310 to know whether or not it is moving. Therefore, it is possible to give a jackpot notification only to the player holding the swing operation member 310, and to improve the interest of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the front / rear position and the vertical position of the swing operation member 310 are different between the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position and the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. Thereby, when operating the swing operation member 310, the player moves the position of the hand in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, so that it is possible to obtain a feeling that the player is operating.

  When the player holds the swing operation member 310, the player's finger swings to the intermediate frame member 312, and the player's fingertip is caught by the back side frame member 311. Since the back side frame member 311 is warped in a manner of drawing an arc having a center of curvature radius on the back side, the fingertip can be easily hooked on the back side frame member 311, as shown in FIG. Even in a posture in which the wrist is hardened as in the case where the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, the fingertip can be prevented from coming off the back side frame member 311.

  Further, since the fingertip is caught by the back side frame member 311, the vibration of the vibration device 366 (see FIG. 11) can be confined inside the palm, and the vibration felt by the player can be largely ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 6, the wrist naturally returns as the swing operation member 310 moves downward in front of the player. Therefore, the operation (see FIG. 22B) for pushing the swing operation member 310 to the back can be performed by extending the wrist in such a manner as to release the turning of the wrist. Thereby, the burden of the player who operates the swing operation member 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 6, compared to the arm length R1 from the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation shaft of the swing operation member 310, the upper end portion of the swing operation member 310 The arm length R2 up to the shaft support rod 363 that is the rotation shaft of the swing operation member 310 is long. Thus, when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated about the pivotal support rod 363, the swing operation member 310 can be easily rotated (by a light force). On the other hand, a large force can be required when the user swings the lower end portion of the swing operation member 310 and rotates the swing operation member 310 about the pivot bar 363 (incorrect operation). Therefore, the burden on the player when the upper part of the swing operation member 310 is gripped and the swing operation member 310 is rotated can be reduced, and the player places a hand on the lower end of the swing operation member 310 and An erroneous operation of rotating the swing operation member 310 can be suppressed.

  FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 of the operation device 300 is disposed in the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is arranged such that a swing operation member 310 projects from the rectangular outer case member 320 to the front side.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. 9 illustrates a state where the outer case member 320 is removed from the inner case member 330 disposed on the inner side of the outer case member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the outer case member 320 is formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the back side is formed, and the inner case member 330 has left and right sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. A front cover 321 attached in a manner of hiding the edge, a long plate-shaped upper cover 322 fitted from the upper side to a protruding portion 321a protruding rearward from the upper end of the front cover 321, the front cover 321 and the upper cover The left cover member 323, the right cover member 324, and the inner case member 330 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 330 from the left and right directions in a manner in which flange portions 321b and 322a extending in a flange shape in the left and right direction of the 322 are fitted. And a sensor base 325 having a plurality of sensor members 325a disposed so as to project inside.

  While the left cover member 323 and the right cover member 324 are fastened and fixed, by fixing the front cover 321 and the upper cover 322 by fitting, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being seen in front view. Therefore, mischief of disassembling the operation device 300 can be prevented.

  The sensor member 325a includes a photocoupler type first sensor member 325a1 inserted through the first sensor insertion hole 332e2, a photocoupler type second sensor member 325a2 inserted through the second sensor insertion hole 332e3, and a second sensor member 325a2. A photocoupler-type third sensor member 325a3 that is disposed below the sensor member 325a2 and is inserted into the sensor insertion hole 332f.

  The first sensor member 325a1 and the second sensor member 325a2 are sensors that detect the posture of the lever member 340, and the third sensor member 325a3 is a sensor that detects the phase of the eccentric cam member 333.

  In addition, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and includes a gap (slit) into which a portion to be detected can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U shape.

  FIG. 10 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. In FIG. 10, the outer case member 320 is not shown and the inner case member 330 is disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the inner case member 330 includes a left cover member 331 and a right cover member 332 that are assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 340 is disposed inside, and an eccentric cam that protrudes from the left cover member 331. An eccentric cam member 333 pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2, and a phase detection member 334 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the same manner as the eccentric cam member 333, with the relative phase of the eccentric cam member 333 being unchanged. A first driving device 335 that generates a driving force that is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 331 from the outside and rotates the eccentric cam member 333, and a lock member 336 that is pivotally supported by a lock shaft 331d3 that protrudes from the left cover member 331. A second driving device 337 that is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 332 from the outside and generates a driving force for rotating the lock member 336, and a lever member A gear damper 338 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 for supporting the 40, mainly comprises.

  The left cover member 331 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening on the right side, and a lower side wall portion 331a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom portion (left side portion in FIG. 10), and a lower side thereof. A rectangular plate-shaped upper side wall portion 331b that is offset to the left (front side in FIG. 10) in front view on the upper side of the side wall portion 331a, and extends to the right from the edges of the lower and upper side wall portions 331a and 331b. A plate-like connecting side wall portion 331c that is in contact with the right cover member 332 except for the upper side portion, and a plurality of rod-like members that are protruded rightward from the lower side wall portion 331a or the upper side wall portion 331b and formed in a columnar shape. 331d, a plurality of insertion holes 331e formed in the upper side wall portion 331b, a photocoupler type sensor member 331f for detecting the attitude of the lock member 336, and a rod-shaped member 331 that projects to the left of the upper side wall portion 331b. Comprising a shaft support 331g lever support shaft 331d1 which is placed on top inner fitting support to bottomed cylindrical among, mainly.

  The right cover member 332 is a bottomed cylindrical member having an opening on the left side, and a lower side wall portion 332a formed in a rectangular plate shape at the bottom (right side portion in FIG. 10), and a lower side thereof A plate-like upper side wall portion 332b that is offset to the right side (front side in FIG. 10) on the upper side of the side wall portion 332a, and the front side extended from the edges of the lower side wall portion 332a and the upper side wall portion 332b to the left. Except for the upper part, a plate-like connecting side wall portion 332c that comes into contact with the left cover member 331 and a lower side wall portion 332a are drilled in a form in which a pair of circular shapes are combined. A drive member insertion hole 332d to be inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 332e formed in the upper side wall portion 332b, a sensor insertion hole 332f through which the third sensor member 325a3 is inserted, and a right side of the upper side wall portion 332b are stretched. Stick out A bottomed cylindrical shaft support portion 332g that fits and supports a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the top of the material 331d, an annular convex portion 332i that is annularly projected on the inner surface side of the upper side wall portion 332b, Is mainly provided.

  The upper side wall portions 331b and 332b are formed in a quarter circle shape centered on the shaft support portions 331g and 332g when viewed from the left and right as viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 17B), and the connecting side wall portions 331c and 332c are Notches 331c1 and 332c1 that are cut in the left-right direction are provided on the upper side on the front side.

  The notches 331c1 and 332c1 are portions through which the lever member 340 is passed, and have a role of preventing lateral displacement of the lever member 340 (positional displacement in the extending direction of the lever support shaft 331d1, which is a swing shaft). Further, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 9) is attached to the inner case member 330 from the front side by utilizing the ¼ circular shape of the upper side wall portions 331b and 332b.

  The rod-shaped member 331d is formed of four columnar members in the present embodiment. That is, the rod-shaped member 331d is a lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the uppermost portion of the left cover member 331, an eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and a right side of the lower side wall portion 331a. Are mainly provided with a lock shaft 331d3 projecting from the auxiliary shaft 331d4 provided below the lock shaft 331d3.

  The lever support shaft 331d1 is a member that is pivotally supported by the lever member 340, and is supported at both ends by being inserted through the shaft support portions 331g and 332g.

  The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is a member that is inserted in a state where the eccentric cam member 333 and the phase detection member 334 are phase-matched.

  Both the lock shaft 331d3 and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 are shafts through which the lock member 336 is inserted. The lock shaft 331d3 is a member through which the shaft support hole 336b of the lock member 336 is supported, and the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is a lock shaft. It is a member that guides the guide hole 336c of the member 336.

  In this embodiment, the insertion hole 331e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 331e1 having a long hole shape along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1 and the circular shape disposed on the back side of the lever support shaft 331d1 is disposed on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. A gear damper insertion hole 331e2 through which the gear damper 338 is inserted, and a drive member insertion hole 331e3 which is disposed below the back side of the gear damper insertion hole 331e2 and is drilled in a combination of a pair of circular shapes. Prepare mainly.

  The guide support hole 331e1 guides the swing of the lever member 340 through which the angle regulating bar member 346 is inserted, and defines the end of the swing of the lever member 340 at the end.

  The sensor member 331f detects the posture of the lock member 336 by detecting that the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 passes through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

  Since the driving member insertion hole 332d has a shape in which a large circle and a small circle are connected to each other, the driving gear 337b of the second driving device 337 can be moved to a large size by adjusting the shape of each circle. The base portion of the portion that pivotally supports the drive gear 337b can be fitted into a small circle.

  Accordingly, the second drive device 337 is inserted into the inner cover member 332 while the drive gear 337b is pivotally supported (a hole having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the drive gear 337b is required), and the second drive device 337 inserted is inserted. Fixing the shaft position (fixing with a hole having a diameter similar to that of the base of the drive shaft of the drive gear 337b) can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion hole 332e is composed of three through holes. That is, the guide support hole 332e1 is formed at a position and shape that matches the guide support hole 331e1 in the left-right direction, and the rectangular shape is disposed on the back side of the shaft support portion 332g. A first sensor insertion hole 332e2 through which the first sensor member 325a1 is inserted, and a rectangular through hole in which the first sensor insertion hole 332e2 is disposed at a position rotated about the shaft support portion 332g. The second sensor insertion hole 332e3 through which the second sensor member 325a2 is inserted is mainly provided.

  The sensor insertion holes 332e2 and 332e3 are through holes through which the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 for detecting the posture of the lever member 340 by detecting that the sensor detection piece 343b of the lever member 340 passes through the gap.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g. Further, plate-like torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h are disposed in front of and below the shaft support portions 331g and 332g, and extend outward in the left-right direction of the left cover member 331 and the right cover member 332, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the torsion spring SP1 is brought into contact with the torsion spring engaging portions 331h and 332h from the upper side, and the other end is brought into contact with the angle regulating bar member 346 from the lower side. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 rises.

  The annular convex portion 332 i is a portion on which the phase detection member 334 is fitted. By fitting the phase detection member 334 to the annular convex portion 332i, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be firmly aligned.

  The first driving device 335 mainly includes a driving motor 335a that generates a driving force, and a driving gear 335b that is pivotally supported by the driving motor 335a. The drive gear 335b meshes with the main body 333a of the eccentric cam member 333, and the drive force is transmitted.

  The lock member 336 is a member that prevents the lever member 340 from swinging, and a main body portion 336a that is formed in a substantially L-shaped bowl shape on the distal end side, and a shaft that is drilled on the proximal end side of the main body portion 336a. A support hole 336b, a guide hole 336c formed along an arc centering on the shaft support hole 336b, and a gear-shaped convex from the base end side of the main body 336a toward the outside in the axial radial direction of the shaft support hole 336b. It mainly includes a gear portion 336d provided and a plate-like detection piece 336e that extends outward in the axial diameter direction of the shaft support hole 336b and that can pass through the gap of the sensor member 331f.

  The guide hole 336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 336c.

  The second drive device 337 mainly includes a drive motor 337a that generates a drive force, and a drive gear 337b that is pivotally supported by the drive motor 337a. The drive gear 337b is engaged with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 336, and the drive force is transmitted.

  The gear damper 338 is a member that imparts viscous resistance to the member that rotates in mesh, and the gear member projects to the right of the left cover member 331 (inside the inner case member 330) through the gear damper insertion hole 331e2, and the gear The member is meshed with the gear portion 342b (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the lever member 340 receives viscous resistance from the gear damper 338 while swinging.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340. FIG. 11 shows a state in which the rear side frame member 311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 310, and the gear damper receiving member 342 fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 340, the posture detecting member 343, and the purpose of preventing destruction. A state in which the peeling member 350 disposed as is disassembled is illustrated.

  The back side frame member 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the outer shell protruding to the back side, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part protrudes (returns) to the front side from the protruding tip (FIG. 17B )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the lever member 340 is formed of a metal material such as iron and is formed into a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, and is fastened and fixed to the left side surface of the main body member 341 in the axial direction. A gear damper receiving member 342 whose outer shape in view is formed in a substantially circular shape, and is axially supported coaxially with the gear damper receiving member 342 so that its outer shape in the axial direction is formed in a substantially circular shape and fastened to the right side surface of the main body member 341 A fixed posture detection member 343, an upper cover member 344 formed in a shape that fits from above to the circular portions of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343, and an upper cover member 344 across the body member 341 Corners inserted through the lower cover member 345 and the cylindrical portion 342a of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the cylindrical portion 343a of the attitude detection member 343, which are opposed to each other. The regulating rod member 346, a peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the shaft hole 341b coaxial with the body member 341 mainly includes a swing member 360 which is disposed on the front end of the body member 341, a.

  The gear damper receiving member 342 mainly includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 342a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a gear portion 342b formed in a gear tooth shape along the outer peripheral surface. In addition, the attitude detection member 343 has a cylindrical cylindrical portion 343a inserted through the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 341, and a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 343a (back side in FIG. 11) in the axial direction. And a plate-like sensor detection piece 343b extending along the main axis.

  The cylindrical portions 342a and 343a are portions that are inserted into the shaft holes 341b of the main body member 341, and a lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10) is inserted on the inner peripheral side. As a result, the lever member 340 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1.

  The gear portion 342 b is a portion that meshes with the gear damper 338 (see FIG. 10), and is a portion that transmits the viscous resistance generated by the gear damper 338 to the lever member 340.

  The sensor detection piece 343b is a portion that can detect the posture of the lever member 340 by passing through the gap between the first sensor member 325a1 or the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 18C).

  The peeling member 350 is disposed coaxially with the shaft hole 341b of the lever member 340, has a plate-like main body member 351 having an insertion hole 352 that is inserted into the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 10), and an upper side of the main body member 351. It mainly includes a rectangular raising member 353 to be fixed, and a magnet member 354 that is arranged on the upper side of the raising member 353 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351 and made of a magnetic material.

  The magnet member 354 is disposed to face the main body member 341 and is fastened and fixed to the main body member 351. Therefore, the magnet member 354 functions to unite or separate the main body member 341 and the main body member 351.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 340.

  The main body member 341 of the lever member 340 includes a main body portion 341a formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the main body portion 341a, and A restriction hole 341c drilled in the left-right direction on the front side of the shaft hole 341b, and an inclination extending downward (downward in FIG. 12) with respect to the extending direction of the main body 341a at the front side end of the main body 341a. A pair of left and right swinging member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e drilled in the left-right direction on the base side of the swinging member support portion 341d, and a left-right direction drilled in the front side of the shaft hole 341e. The restriction hole 341f is mainly provided.

  The shaft hole 341b is a through hole through which the cylindrical portions 342a and 343a (see FIG. 11) are inserted and the lever support shaft 331d1 is inserted. That is, the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are pivotally supported coaxially with the axis of the shaft hole 341b.

  The restriction hole 341c is a through hole in which the angle restriction rod member 346 is supported.

  The shaft hole 341e is a through-hole through which the shaft support bar 363 that supports the swinging member 360 is inserted, and the restriction hole 341f is a through-hole through which the restriction bar 365 that regulates the swing angle of the swinging member 360 is inserted. It is. Note that the inner diameter of the shaft hole 341e is larger than that of the restriction hole 341f by the amount of the buffer member 364 disposed around the shaft support bar 363.

  The upper cover member 344 is formed of a resin material, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from the upper side, and forms a curved surface along a circle centering on the shaft hole 341b on the back side. A guide portion 344a, an outer fitting portion 344b that is connected to the guide portion 344a and can be externally fitted to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340, and has a U-shaped cross section. And a connecting portion 344c for connecting the fitting portion 344b. The connecting portion 344c is thinned (see FIG. 22).

  The lower cover member 345 is a member made of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 from below, and extends in the left-right direction in a shape along a circle centering on the shaft hole 341b. The rear guide portion 345a, the outer fitting portion 345b formed in a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted from the lower side to the main body portion 341 of the lever member 340, and the back guide portion 345a across the outer fitting portion 345b. A front curved surface portion 345c that is disposed on the side and is curved toward the front surface, and a front guide portion 345d that extends from the left and right ends of the front curved surface portion 345c to the front side.

  The back guide portion 345a is a portion disposed along the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330 together with the guide portion 344a of the upper cover member 344. In the assembled state, the front cover 321 (see FIG. 8) and the upper cover 322 (see FIG. 8) of the outer case member 320 are disposed in a manner that covers the edges of the back guide portion 345a and the guide portion 344a. Thereby, the back surface guide part 345a and the guide part 344a can prevent dust and a ball (game ball, game medium) from entering the inner case member 330.

  Both the front curved surface portion 345c and the front guide portion 345d are portions that guide the swinging of the main body member 361 of the swinging member 360 (see FIG. 11). The front curved surface portion 345c receives a displacement in the rotational direction of the swinging member 360 and an impact when the lens member 317 (see FIG. 10) is pushed in. The front guide portion 345d causes the swinging member 360 to move in the axial direction. Is prevented from being displaced.

  Since the lower cover member 345 is disposed opposite to the lower end portion of the notch 331c1 (see FIG. 10) of the inner case member 330, the outer case member 320 (see FIG. 8) when the lever member 340 is pushed down. It is possible to prevent the main body member 341 (formed of a metal material) of the lever member 340 from coming into direct contact. That is, the lower cover member 345 formed of a resin material is disposed therebetween, whereby the impact when the lever member 340 and the outer case member 320 abut can be mitigated.

  The swing member 360 is a member that is disposed at the front side end portion of the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 and can swing around the shaft hole 341e, and on the outer side in the left-right direction of the swing member support portion 341d. A plate-like main body member 361 having a side wall portion 361 a and having a U-shaped cross section, and a wall portion on the front side of the main body member 361 and coaxial with the main body member 361. The plate-shaped motor fixing plate 362, the columnar shaft support rod 363 inserted through the shaft hole 361c and the shaft hole 341e of the main body member 361, and the shaft support rod 363 are fitted inside and outside the shaft hole 341e. The buffer member 364 to be fitted, the torsion spring SP2 wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, the columnar regulation rod 365 inserted and fixed in the regulation hole 341f, and the motor fixing plate 362 are fastened and fixed. A vibration device 366 comprised of a voice coil motor that generates a linear vibration in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the plate 362 mainly comprises a.

  The main body member 361 includes a pair of plate-like side wall portions 361a arranged opposite to each other, a front wall portion 361b that connects the side wall portions 361a at the front end portions, and a pair of side wall portions 361a that are coaxially and circularly drilled. A shaft hole 361c in which the buffer member 364 is fitted, a long hole-shaped angle regulating hole 361d formed along a circle centered on the shaft hole 361c, and a side wall 361a; It mainly includes a fixed plate portion 361e that is bent in a direction away from each other on the upper side of the front wall portion 361b and to which the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed.

  Since the outer shape of the rear side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft hole 361c, the main body member 361 is moved in a state where the rear side end portion of the side wall portion 361a is slid on the front curved surface portion 345c. It can be swung.

  The shaft hole 361c is externally supported by the buffer member 364 in the same manner as the shaft hole 341e. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the vibration generated on the swinging member 360 side from being transmitted to the main body member 341 side of the lever member 340.

  The angle regulation hole 361d includes a buffer member 361d1 formed from a resin material. The buffer member 361d1 is attached so as to cover the inner peripheral surface of the angle regulating hole 361d. Thereby, the impact at the time of the control rod 365 contact | abutting to the angle control hole 361d can be suppressed.

  The motor fixing plate 362 includes a plate-like main body portion 362a that is vertically locked with respect to the front wall portion 361b of the main body member 361, and a pair of side wall portions 362b that are bent at the left and right end portions of the main body portion 362a. Is mainly provided.

  The main body portion 362a is locked by projecting a protrusion 362a1 on the front side and inserting the protrusion 362a1 into a hole formed in the front wall portion 361b.

  The side wall 362b has a shaft hole 362b1 having the same diameter as the shaft hole 341e, and is a portion that is externally supported by the buffer member 364, and is disposed on the inner side in the left-right direction of the swinging member support 341d. That is, the swinging member support portion 341d is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the side wall portion 361a and the side wall portion 362b.

  The buffer member 364 is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the main body member 341 from the outside. The insertion portion 364a that is the insertion tip side is formed with a small diameter, and the root portion 364b that is formed on the root side with respect to the insertion portion 364a. Is formed larger in diameter than the insertion portion 364a.

  Of the members that are externally fitted and supported by the buffer member 364, the main body member 361 is externally fitted to the root portion 364b, and the main body member 341 and the motor fixing plate 362 are externally fitted to the insertion portion 364a.

  The vibration device 366 is a device that operates a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force. The vibration device 366 is a cylindrical member that is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing plate 362 and is wound around a copper wire. A certain bobbin member 366a, a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a, and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 366a are coaxially arranged and have a disk shape. And a pressing member 366b (see FIG. 19) connected by a plate.

  The pressing member 366b is formed of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

  One end of the torsion spring SP <b> 2 is locked to the main body member 341, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP <b> 2 biases the swinging member 360 in the direction in which it is tilted with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. In addition, illustration of the back side frame member 311 is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the swing operation member 310 is fastened and fixed to the rear side frame member 311 (see FIG. 11) and the rear side frame member 311 and to the fixing plate portion 361 e of the swing member 360. An annular plate-shaped intermediate frame member 312, a vibration guide member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side of the intermediate frame member 312 in a state where the phases of the intermediate frame member 312 are matched, and the vibration guide member 313 A light guide member 313a that protrudes from the center is inserted and a vibration member 314 that is formed in a disk shape that does not have a hole in the center and a vibration coil spring CS1 that is fixed to the center of the vibration member 314 The switch member 315 disposed opposite to the vibration member 314, the intermediate member 316 fitted from the front side of the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316 are accommodated on the back side. A lens member 317 which is fitted supported on the vibrating member 314, mainly comprises.

  With the configuration described above, in the swing operation member 310, the intermediate frame member 312 and the vibration guide member 313 are fixed to each other, the vibration member 314 and the lens member 317 are fixed to each other, and the switch member 315 and the intermediate member 316 are fixed to each other. .

  The intermediate frame member 312 has an annular plate-shaped bottom portion 312a, a side wall portion 312b extending forward from the outer periphery of the bottom portion 312a, and a front surface in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the bottom portion 312a. A plurality of cylindrical switch support bars 312c, and a back button member 312d that is movably disposed in the front-rear direction on the back side of the bottom 312a.

  The bottom portion 312a includes rectangular recessed portions 312a1 that are recessed from the radial direction toward the center at the upper, lower, left, and right ends in FIG.

  The recessed portion 312a1 is a portion through which the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is inserted, and the distal end portion of the arm portion 315f of the switch member 315 is locked to the side wall portion 312b (see FIG. 21A). Thus, the switch member 315 is disposed so that it cannot be pulled out with respect to the intermediate frame member 312.

  The switch support bar 312c is a member that is inserted through the vibration guide member 313, the vibration member 314, and the switch member 315 in common. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 from being inclined in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of the respective members). Therefore, for example, even when a force is applied to the lens member 317 from the front-rear direction and the inclined direction, it is possible to suppress resistance from being pushed in the lens member 317 and to improve the operability of the push-in operation. . Further, when the vibration member 314 is vibrated by the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 can be prevented from being inclined.

  Here, the vibration of the vibration device 366 means a vibration that the member shakes finely, a reciprocating operation in which the member moves in a linear direction, and collides with another member at the end of movement and returns.

  The back button member 312d is usually disposed at a position protruding to the back side by a coil spring interposed between the bottom button 312a and includes a plate-like detection piece 312d1 at the center on the front side.

  The vibration guide member 313 includes a plurality of light guide members 313a erected on the front side (eight in this embodiment), a plurality of insertion holes 313b through which the switch support rod 312c is inserted, and a front end side at the lower end. A photocoupler-type first sensor member 313c provided and a photocoupler-type second sensor member 313d disposed on the back side at the upper end portion are mainly provided.

  The light guide member 313a is a transparent member in which a light emitting member such as an LED is disposed on the back side. The light guide member 313 a is inserted into the vibration member 314, the switch member 315, and the intermediate member 316, so that the distal end portion is disposed opposite to the lens member 317 (closely disposed). Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting member can be guided to the vicinity of the lens member 317, and the effect of causing the lens member 317 to emit light can be improved.

  Further, as described above, the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are prevented from being tilted in the operation direction when the vibration member 314 and the switch member 315 are operated in the front-rear direction (stacking direction of each member). Further, when the switch member 315 is inclined, it can be prevented from coming into contact with the light guide member 313a and damaging the light guide member 313a.

  The first sensor member 313c is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 315g (see FIG. 21A) disposed on the switch member 315 has passed through the gap and detects the arrangement of the switch member 315.

  The second sensor member 313d is a detection member that detects that the detection piece 312d1 has passed through the gap and detects a swinging posture of a swing operation member 310 described later.

  The vibration member 314 has a cross-sectional outer diameter shape that is substantially the same as the bottom portion 312a and a plurality of (through a substantially disc-shaped main body portion 314a in which no hole is formed in the central portion and a switch support rod 312c. In this embodiment, the switch support holes 314b are provided at four locations, the central cylindrical portion 314c is projected in a cylindrical shape from the central portion to the front side of the main body portion 314a, and the vibration coil spring CS1 is wound and supported, and the switch support rod 312c. A switch receiving member 314d inserted through the push-in coil spring CS2 from the front end portion thereof, a sensor receiving hole 314e drilled in a shape capable of storing the first sensor member 313c in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 314a, A light guide hole 314f through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted is mainly provided.

  Note that the pushing coil spring CS2 has a smaller elastic coefficient than the vibration coil spring CS1.

  Since the outer shape of the main body 314a is substantially the same as that of the bottom 312a, the arm 315f of the switch member 315 can be inserted through four recessed portions formed in the outer peripheral portion.

  The switch receiving member 314d is a cylindrical member in which a large-diameter portion 314d1 having a diameter larger than that of the switch support hole 314b is formed on the front side, and is inserted into the switch support hole 314b from the front side so as to have a large diameter. The portion 314d1 is locked in the switch support hole 314b. The pushing coil spring CS2 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the switch support hole 314b.

  The switch member 315 includes a disc-shaped main body 315a, a spring receiving portion 315b formed on the cup so as to project from the center of the main body 315a toward the front side (left side in FIG. 13), and a switch A switch support hole 315c through which the support bar 312c can be inserted, a light guide hole 315d formed through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and a pair of switch receiving members disposed at the upper and lower centers (upper and lower centers in FIG. 13). The guide shaft 315e inserted through 314d, the arm portion 315f inserted into the recessed portion 312a1 and locked, and the gap between the first sensor member 313c can be passed and the lower portion of the main body portion 315a (lower side in FIG. 13) ) And a plate-like detection piece 315g that protrudes on the back side.

  The switch support hole 315c is formed with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the switch support bar 312c, and is formed with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the large diameter portion 314d1 of the switch receiving member 314d. Thereby, when the switch member 315 moves in the direction approaching the vibration member 314, the switch member 315 can be supported by the large-diameter portion 314d1.

  Since the guide shaft 315e is inserted through the switch receiving member 314d, the inclination of the switch member 315 with respect to the vibration member 314 can be suppressed.

  The intermediate member 316 includes a light guide hole 316a through which the light guide member 313a can be inserted, and is externally fixed to the switch member 315 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  14 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 333, FIG. 14 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 333, and FIG. 14 (c) is XIVc-XIVc of FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the eccentric cam member 333 in a line.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the eccentric cam member 333 includes a main body portion 333a formed as a rotating gear, a cylindrical tubular portion 333b disposed coaxially with a rotation axis of the main body portion 333a, and a cylindrical shape thereof. A cam portion 333c that extends in the axial direction along a circle inscribed in the portion 333b, is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 333b, and is hollow inside, and a tip portion of the cylindrical portion 333b along the axial direction. A pair of cutouts 333d to be cut out, a plate-like rib portion 333e that connects the cylindrical portion 333b and the cam portion 333c in the direction passing through both axes, and a disc-shaped umbrella that covers the gear portion of the main body portion 333a Part 333f.

  The main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c are arranged so as to be shifted in the axial direction (in a two-layer structure). Since the cam portion 333c is hollow, when the cam portion 333c comes into contact with the lever member 340, the cam portion 333c is slightly bent inward (elastically deformed) to absorb an impact.

  The cam portion 333c is a hollow annular portion having a circular outer shape, and is eccentrically fixed to the main body portion 333a.

  The notches 333d are for making the relative phase with the phase detection member 334 (see FIG. 15) unchanged, and a pair of notches arranged opposite to each other are formed with different circumferential lengths. As a result, it is possible to prevent the phase detection member 334 from being inverted 180 degrees and assembled.

  The rib portion 333e is arranged in such a manner that the cylindrical portion 333b is connected to a position farthest from the cylindrical portion 333b of the cam portion 333c, so that the strength of the cam portion 333c formed hollow is most strong. The strength of the weakened portion can be improved. Thereby, it can suppress that the cam part 333c is damaged.

  The rib portion 333e may be partially divided in the middle of the longitudinal direction. Thereby, when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam part 333c is small, no load is applied to the rib part 333e, and the rib part 333e is divided only when the degree of bending (elastic deformation) of the cam part 333c is large. The parts can be brought into contact with each other. Accordingly, the rib portion 333e can be prevented from being fatigued while the rib portion 333e is not in contact (when the degree of flexure (elastic deformation) of the cam portion 333c is small), and thus the durability of the rib portion 333e is improved. Can be made.

  15A is a front view of the phase detection member 334, FIG. 15B is a bottom view of the phase detection member 334, and FIG. 15C is XVc-XVc of FIG. 15A. It is sectional drawing of the phase detection member 334 in a line. In FIG. 15C, the annular convex portion 332i and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17A) are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the phase detection member 334 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose diameter is enlarged on the way, and a shaft support portion 334 a that is externally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331 d 2 (see FIG. 10), and its shaft support portion. A diameter-enlarged portion 334b that is connected to 334a and expands toward the front side (upward in FIG. 15C) (expanded in two steps), and an axial direction from the front-side end of the enlarged-diameter portion 334b Are mainly provided with a plate-like detection piece 334c extending in the shape and a detent projection 334d having a shape matching the notch 333d.

  The enlarged diameter portion 334b is a portion that is externally fitted to an annular convex portion 332i (see FIG. 10) that is annularly provided on the inner surface side of the right cover member 332. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is supported by the inner surface of the annular convex portion 332i, and the diameter-enlarged portion 334b of the phase detection member 334 is supported from the inner peripheral side by the outer surface of the annular convex portion 332i, so that the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is strengthened. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2 can be prevented from being displaced when receiving a load from the radial direction.

  The detection piece 334c can pass through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9). When the detection piece 334c passes through the gap of the third sensor member 325a3, the posture of the eccentric cam member 333 whose relative phase with the phase detection member 334 is unchanged is detected by the rotation projection 334d and the notch 333d engaging with each other. can do.

  16 (a) is a front view of the lever member 340, FIG. 16 (b) is a side view of the lever member 340 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIb in FIG. 16 (a), and FIG. It is a top view of the lever member 340 in the arrow XVIb direction view of Fig.16 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 16A, compared to the shaft hole 341b, the shaft hole 341e is a straight line facing the longitudinal direction of the main body member 341 and below the straight line passing through the shaft hole 341b (FIG. 16A ) Located below). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the load generated on the swinging member 360 side from being applied along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340, and the load can be directed to the rotation direction of the lever member 340.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, the main body member 341 is formed in a U shape in cross section, and a peeling member 350 is disposed on the open side of the U shape. A slight gap is provided between the body member 341 and the raising member 353 or the magnet member 354.

  Thereby, when the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, the strength of the main body member 341 is increased by filling the U-shaped open side (downward in FIG. 16B) of the main body member 341 with the peeling member 350. Can be secured.

  Further, when the peeling member 350 starts to be peeled off from the state in which the peeling member 350 is fixed to the main body member 341, or in the direction in which the peeling member 350 comes close to the main body member 341 from the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off (see FIG. The movement resistance when moving to can be increased.

  Accordingly, it is possible to increase the movement resistance when the peeling member 350 moves relative to the main body member 341. For example, the lever member 340 is controlled in the state where the swinging is restricted (see FIG. 22A). When the member 340 receives an overload and the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, the main body member 341 can be prevented from swinging at a high speed due to the momentum of the applied load.

  FIG. 17A is a front view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position (a state in which the player has performed a push-down operation).

  18A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 18B is a portion of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18C is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. 19 is a partially enlarged view of the swing operation member 310 of FIG. 18 (b) and 18 (c) are slightly larger than FIG. 18 (a), and in FIG. 19, the central axis of the vibration device 366 of the swing operation member 310 is oriented in the vertical direction. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side with the swing operation member 310 disposed at the upward position, the eccentric cam member 333 is applied to the lower side surface of the peeling member 350. Since the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface and the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging in both directions, the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position.

  As in the present embodiment, the lock member 336 is swung around the lock shaft 331d3, and the eccentric cam member 333 is located on the opposite side of the separation member 350 at the portion where the lock member 336 prevents the separation member 350 from swinging. Is arranged, the posture of the lock member 336 in a state where the peeling member 350 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 336 can be adjusted in design.

  In this embodiment, when the distance between the rotation shaft of the lock member 336 and the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 is closest, that is, the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the opposite side of the peeling member 350 and the cylindrical portion 333b. The lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the peeling member 350 only in a state in which is in contact with the peeling member 350.

  In other words, the length of the main body 336a of the lock member 336 is formed such that the L-shaped buttocks abut on the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 in a state where the peeling member 350 is in contact with the cylindrical portion 333b. .

  Therefore, in a state where the lock member 336 is in contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350 and the swing operation member 310 is fixed in the upward position, the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 is always on the lower side of the peeling member 350. It is abutted on the side surface. Therefore, when an overload is applied in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 moves upward from a state in which the swing operation member 310 is fixed at the upward position, the overload is applied to the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333. It can prevent being applied and can prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, the gear portion 342b of the gear damper receiving member 342 and the gear damper 338 arranged on the back side of the gear damper receiving member 342 are engaged with each other. As will be described later, the gear damper 338 has a role of generating a viscous resistance against the swinging of the lever member 340 and a role of generating a resistance force that resists the load when the lever member 340 receives a load pushing backward. Have both.

  By providing the gear damper 338, for example, when the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the resistance when the player operates the swing operation member 310 at a high speed is large. On the other hand, the resistance when the speed is low, such as when the lever member 340 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1, can be reduced.

  As a result, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be set smaller and the design flexibility of the torsion spring SP1 can be improved as compared with the case where a large resistance corresponding to the high-speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, the sensor detection piece 343b is arranged in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 and the detection piece of the phase detection member 334 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position. 334c is disposed in the gap of the third sensor member 325a3. In other words, the lock member 336 is swung only when the sensor detection piece 343b is disposed in the gap between the second sensor members 325a2 and the detection piece 334c of the phase detection member 334 is disposed in the gap between the third sensor members 325a3. By doing so, the lock member 336 can be brought into contact with the upper side surface of the peeling member 350.

  As will be described later, when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341, the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap between the second sensor members 325a2. Therefore, it is detected that the lock member 336 is not swung from the state of FIG. 18A (detected by the sensor member 331f) and that the sensor detection piece 343b is moved from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2. Thus, it can be detected that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341.

  20 is a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 taken along the line XX-XX in FIG. The illustration of the back side frame member 311 is omitted. As shown in FIG. 20, the back button member 312d is disposed on the back side of the intermediate frame member 312 and is biased in a direction away from the intermediate frame member 312 by the coil spring. In the state where no load is applied, the detection piece 312d1 is separated from the second sensor member 313d. On the other hand, a pressing load (a load directed upward in FIG. 20) is applied to the back button member 312d, and the back button member 312d is moved until the detection piece 312d1 is inserted into the gap of the second sensor member 313d. It can be detected that the back button member 312d is pushed.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 21A shows a state in which the vibration device 366 is operated from the state of FIGS. 18A and 19 and a load is generated upward. In FIG. 21B, FIG. ) And the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG.

  As described above, the switch member 315 is locked so as not to be pulled out from the intermediate frame member 312, and the vibration member 314 is interposed between the switch member 315 and the intermediate frame member 312. The vibration member 314 is the vibration coil spring CS1. Thus, it is pressed toward the intermediate frame member 312 (downward in FIG. 21A).

  From this state, when the pressing member 366b is pressed against the vibration member 314 by the electromagnetic force generated when a current flows through a copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the switch member 315. Move in the direction of pressing. As a result, the lens member 317 fitted and fixed to the vibration member 314 moves (upward in FIG. 21A). In this state, since the step portion 317a of the lens member 317 is in contact with the switch member 315, it is difficult to push in the lens member 317 (becomes hard and cannot be pushed in).

  On the other hand, when the vibration member 314 is separated from the lens member 317, the player can push in the lens member 317 (pushable state). Therefore, the timing at which the player performs an input operation through the lens member 317 can be specified by driving the vibration member 314.

  In addition, since a pushable state in which the lens member 317 can be pushed in and a non-pushable state in which the lens member 317 is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in are configured, the lever member 340 is affected by the operation performed by the player. It can be switched on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) side.

  For example, when the player repeatedly pushes the lens member 317 repeatedly (striking), the lever member 340 is caused to react with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 18 (a) when returning from the state where the lens member 317 is pushed. The swing operation member 310 is subjected to a load in a direction close to (see)). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in is disabled, the entire swinging operation member 310 is pushed down by the player's push-in operation, so that the lever member 340 is also separated from the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 18A). Move in the direction. Therefore, even if the player strikes the lens member 317 repeatedly, the situation where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 collide with each other when the swinging operation member 310 is returned upward by the biasing force can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a method of constructing the incompressible state, the lens member 317 is moved to the end position by a method of locking the lens member 317 with a hook-like claw or a vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor that performs a linear reciprocating motion. Examples include a method of overhanging (continuing a load in one direction). According to the method of projecting the lens member 317 to the end position by the vibration device 366 such as a voice coil motor, the lens member 317 is vibrated by the vibration device 366 and the lens member 317 is made incapable of being pushed in. Both effects can occur.

  The direction of movement of the pressing member 366b can be reversed by reversing the direction of the current flowing through the copper wire (not shown) wound around the bobbin member 366a of the vibration device 366. Here, since the vibration member 314 is not attracted by the force of the electromagnetic force, the moving speed may be slow. In this embodiment, the vibration member 314 is pressed against the pressing member 366b by the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1. Following this, it moves downward in FIG.

  Thereby, the vibration of the lens member 317 can be speeded up without fastening and fixing the pressing member 366b and the vibration member 314.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed in. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the step 317a formed on the back side of the lens member 317 abuts on the arm 315f of the switch member 315, so that the lens member 317 and the vibration member 314 move integrally with the switch member 315. Therefore, since the contraction degree of the vibration coil spring CS1 does not change, it is possible to prevent the elastic recovery force of the vibration coil spring CS1 from acting as a resistance when the lens member 317 is pushed in.

  After the lens member 317 is pushed in, the switch receiving member 314d (see FIG. 13) that is in contact with the lower side surface of the switch member 315 pushes up the switch member 315 by the elastic recovery force of the pushing coil spring CS2. The lens member 317 returns to the position before being pushed (see FIG. 18A).

  That is, the pushing coil spring CS2 that returns the position of the lens member 317 when the lens member 317 is pushed in and the vibration coil spring CS1 that returns the position of the vibration member 314 can be formed of different members.

  In this embodiment, since the elastic coefficient of the pushing coil spring CS2 is made smaller than that of the vibrating coil spring CS1, the pushing operation of the lens member 317 is performed with a small force while ensuring a high speed for returning the vibrating member 314. be able to. Therefore, the ease of the pushing operation of the lens member 317 can be improved while ensuring the magnitude of vibration that the player feels passively.

  22A and 22B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 22A and 22B show a state in which the lock member 336 is swung to the fixed side, and in FIG. 22A, the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position. In FIG. 22B, the state is illustrated, and the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed into the back side (right side in FIG. 22B) from the state of FIG. 22A is illustrated.

  The lever member 340 that supports the swing operation member 310 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 about the lever support shaft 331d1 (clockwise in FIG. 22A). Therefore, even if the lock member 336 is swung in the releasing direction (FIG. 22 (a) clockwise) from the state of FIG. 22 (a), the swing operation member 310 can be held in the upward position.

  The swing of the lever member 340 due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is stopped by the lever member 340 coming into contact with the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the upper cover 322, and the eccentric cam member 333. In this way, by preparing a plurality of locations that are brought into contact when the lever member 340 is stopped, the load applied to the lever member 340 can be dispersed, and damage to the lever member 340 can be suppressed. . Hereinafter, each contact location will be described in detail.

  Since the angle restricting bar member 346 is inserted into the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1, the swinging of the lever member 340 is stopped by the angle restricting bar member 346 coming into contact with the end portions of the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. Can do. As described above with reference to FIG. 10, the guide support holes 331 e 1 and 332 e 1 are disposed with the lever member 340 sandwiched in the swing axis direction, so that when the lever member 340 is stopped, the lever member 340 is centered on the longitudinal direction. It is possible to suppress tilting in the turning direction.

  The connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344 can contact the upper cover 322. The connecting portion 344c is formed with a step portion 344c1 that is a portion that contacts the upper cover 322 perpendicularly, and a space is formed between the connecting portion 344c and the lever member 340 (see FIG. 22A). Therefore, even when the upper cover 322 abuts on the stepped portion 344c1, the connecting portion 344c can be deformed toward the space, so that an impact generated between the connecting portion 344c and the upper cover 322 can be reduced. it can.

  Thereby, since it can suppress that an impact is transmitted to the main body member 341, the structure of the main body member 341 can be simplified and the weight reduction of the lever member 340 whole can be achieved. In this case, the elastic coefficient required for the torsion spring SP1 can be suppressed, and accordingly, the driving force required for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 10) that drives the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  The upper cover member 344 has a role of preventing dust and balls (game balls and game media) from entering the inside of the inner case member 330 in addition to the role of reducing the impact. That is, even if the lever member 340 is swung (see FIG. 23B), the space between the upper cover member 344 and the upper cover 322 is always closed, so that the dust is placed inside the inner case member 330. Or balls (game balls, game media) can be prevented from entering.

  Further, the upper cover member 344 can be brought into contact with the notch 331c1 of the inner case member 330 in the swing axis direction (direction perpendicular to FIG. 22A). As a result, the main body member 341 can be prevented from wobbling in the swing axis direction using the upper cover member 344.

  The peeling member 350 of the lever member 340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 333. The eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged by bringing the lever member 340 into contact with the eccentric cam member 333 with the cylindrical portion 333b of the eccentric cam member 333 facing the peeling member 350 side.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, in the operation device 300, a straight line L <b> 1 indicating the central axis in the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 passes through the shaft support bar 363. For this reason, the vibration impact of the vibration device 366 is applied to the shaft support rod 363, but a buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12) is disposed between the shaft support rod 363 and the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 12). Therefore, the shock of vibration can be reduced by the buffer member 364. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to the lever member 340 can be suppressed.

  An angle between the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 along the longitudinal direction of the lever member 340 is an angle θ1. Thereby, the vibration generated by the vibration device 366 can be decomposed into a directional component along the straight line L2 and a directional component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2, and transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 to vibrate the pachinko machine 10. The load to be caused (the load in the direction along the straight line L2) can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the force applied in the pushing direction (parallel to the straight line L1) of the lens member 317 can be decomposed into a direction component along the straight line L2 and a direction component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2. By pushing the lens member 317, the load applied to the lever support shaft 331d1 can be suppressed.

  The vibration device 366 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 22A) of the lever support shaft 331d1, and the reaction that occurs when the vibration device 366 operates causes the swinging member support portion 341d of the main body member 341 to push downward. Directed. Therefore, the main body member 341 can be swung in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 by the vibration of the vibration device 366. Thereby, it can suppress that the eccentric cam member 333 receives load by the vibration of the vibration apparatus 366. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, in the state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c. In this case, the direction F1 of the load generated toward the lever member 340 is directed to push down the swinging member support portion 341d of the lever member 340 around the lever support shaft 331d1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a load on the eccentric cam member 333 from being generated by pushing the swing operation member 310.

  In a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed in, the straight line L1 and the straight line L2 form an angle θ2. Since the angle θ2 is larger than the angle θ1, the direction component along the straight line L2 of the vibration of the vibration device 366 can be made smaller than that in the state of FIG. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed by pushing the swing operation member 310.

  In addition, the direction component along the vertical direction of the straight line L2 can be increased. Therefore, the lever member 340 can be easily swung counterclockwise in FIG. 22B by utilizing the reaction of vibration, and the vibration mode felt by the player who pushes the swing operation member 310 is felt. A plurality of types of vibrations can be produced: vibrations in the linear direction along the straight line L1 and vibrations in which the swing operation member 310 rotates about the shaft support bar 363.

  23A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIc-XVIIIc in FIG. FIG. FIG. 23 shows a state in which the main body member 341 is pulled away from the peeling member 350 and the swinging operation member 310 is pushed down while the peeling member 350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336. A cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, a load of a predetermined amount or more (a load of an adsorption force or more by magnetic force) is applied in the direction of pushing the lens member 317, or a load of a predetermined amount or more (by the magnetic force) in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310. The main body member 341 is pulled off from the magnet member 354 and the swing operation member 310 moves to the state shown in FIG. Thereby, it can suppress that a big load is applied between the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350, and the lock member 336 and the peeling member 350 are damaged.

  An eccentric cam member 333 is disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the lever member 340 moves when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, and no matter how much the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, Since the load is not transmitted, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 23B, it is possible to detect that the peeling member 350 has been peeled off from the main body member 341 by moving the sensor detection piece 343b from the gap of the second sensor member 325a2.

  In this case, the attracting force due to the magnetic force generated between the magnet member 354 and the main body member 341 suddenly disappears, and the swing operation member 310 moves downward vigorously. Therefore, the lever member 340 may swing too much, and there is a possibility that a burden is generated on the guide support holes 331e1 and 332e1. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the rear side frame member 311 and the front cover 321 of the swing operation member 310 are disposed to face each other, so that the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the surface. Even when it rotates too much, the load can be reduced by the deformation of the back frame member 311 or the front cover. Thereby, it can suppress that the lever member 340 is damaged.

  23A, the main body member 341 is swung clockwise in FIG. 23A by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 by releasing the load applied by the player downward from the state shown in FIG. Is again adsorbed to the peeling member 350. Thereby, the attitude | position (arrangement | positioning) of the lever member 340 (and main body member 341) can be stabilized, and it can make it easy for a player to perform the next operation.

  Since the peeling member 350 is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331 d 1 that is the swinging shaft of the main body member 341, the weight of the peeling member 350 is not enough for the main body member 341 to swing when the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. Does not move in the direction of movement.

  That is, the weight balance of the main body member 341 before and after the lever support shaft 331d1 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is attracted to the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled from the main body member 341. That is, when the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the moment in the direction of pushing down the swing operation member 310 applied to the main body member 341 is increased. Thereby, after the peeling member 350 is peeled off, the speed at which the main body member 341 rises can be reduced, so that the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the main body member 341 is attracted to the peeling member 350 is suppressed. Can do.

  Further, the main body member 341 is formed in a U-shaped cross section, and the peeling member 350 moves in a manner of entering the U-shaped closing side from the U-shaped open side of the main body member 341, so the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are moved. When the frictional resistance is generated between the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350, the speed at which the main body member 341 adsorbs to the peeling member 350 can be reduced.

  Since the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 is transmitted to the main body member 341 and is transmitted to the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off. It is possible to prevent the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 from acting on the member 333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 or the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged in a state where the peeling member 350 and the main body member 341 are peeled off.

  In the state of FIG. 23A, the peeling member 350 is fixed to the eccentric cam member 333 and the lock member 336. Therefore, when the sensor detection piece 343b enters the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 again, It can be detected that the member 341 and the peeling member 350 are adsorbed.

  24A and 24B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 24A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is swung from the state of FIG. 22A to the release side (FIG. 24A clockwise), and FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated about 180 degrees from the state of 24 (a) and the lever member 340 is swung is illustrated. Further, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  When the detection piece 336e of the lock member 336 enters the gap of the sensor member 331f, it can be detected that the lock member 336 is swung to the release side. After detecting that the lock member 336 is swung to the release side, the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated by rotating the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) of the first drive device 335, and the lever member 340 is swung. Can be made. The eccentric cam member 333 may be continuously rotated in one direction, or the rotation direction may be switched halfway.

  While the eccentric cam member 333 is rotating, the lever member 340 is biased in a direction (FIG. 24 (a) clockwise direction) pressed against the eccentric cam member 333 by the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in conjunction with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. Thereby, the player's attention can be easily collected on the swing operation member 310.

  When the vibration device 366 operates in the state shown in FIG. 24A or FIG. 24B, the reaction of the vibration acts in the direction of pushing down the main body member 341 along the straight line L1. Therefore, the lever member 340 swings in the direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 due to the reaction of vibration, and therefore it is possible to suppress the load on the eccentric cam member 333 due to the operation of the vibration device 366.

  Consider a case where the lens member 317 is pushed in. Assuming that the direction of the load applied to the lens member 317 is along the straight line L1 when the lens member 317 is pushed in, the lever member 340 moves downward as the lens member 317 is pushed (FIG. 24 ( There is a possibility of swinging a) or turning the swing operation member 310 (clockwise in FIG. 24A).

  In this embodiment, in any case, a load that swings the lever member 340 in a direction away from the eccentric cam member 333 is applied. Therefore, the load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 by pushing the lens member 317. Can be suppressed. Thereby, durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  FIGS. 25A and 25B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 25A shows a state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 from the state shown in FIG. 24B, and FIG. 25B shows the state shown in FIG. From this state, a state in which the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle θ3 is shown, and a sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 25A and 25B, the outer shapes of the lever member 340 and the swing operation member 310 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is pushed down are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, the swinging member 360 is urged forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 25), so that the player can easily hold the swinging operation member 310 and push it down. That is, when a force is applied in the direction M1 (see FIG. 25A) from the state of FIG. 24B to push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 is swung (shaft support rod). The swinging operation member 310 can be immediately pressed down without causing the swinging operation to swing around 363).

  Here, if the lever member 340 can be separated from the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 can be urged from a position away from the eccentric cam member 333 and can collide with the eccentric cam member 333 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b), the swinging operation member 310 can be pushed up from the position of the imaginary line to the position of the solid line), so that the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged by making the eccentric cam member 333 hollow. That is, it is possible to suppress the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged by receiving the load from the lever member 340 due to the elastic deformation of the eccentric cam member 333.

  As described above, the eccentric cam member 333 can swing the lever member 340 by continuously rotating regardless of the rotation direction. Here, characteristics of the rotation direction will be described.

  FIG. 25A shows the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (hereinafter, this phase is referred to as “retraction phase”) when the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position (the state shown in FIG. 24A). Indicates the rotation angle. That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25A, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ1 by clockwise rotation.

  FIG. 25B shows the rotation angle from the phase (retraction phase) of the eccentric cam member 333 in the state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position (the state of FIG. 24A). That is, in order to rotate from the retracted phase to the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 of FIG. 25B, it is necessary to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 by an angle φ2 by counterclockwise rotation. Here, the angle φ1 is smaller than the angle φ2 (φ1 <φ2).

  Assuming that the eccentric cam member 333 rotates at a constant speed, the direction in which the lever member 340 is urged by the torsion spring SP1 and the direction of rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are greater when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted phase. Can be shortened compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise (period of angle φ2).

  Further, when the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated clockwise from the retracted position, the lever member 340 is in a state where the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 333 and the direction in which the lever member 340 is biased by the torsion spring SP1 are opposed to each other. And the eccentric cam member 333 can be brought closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 (the position where the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 contact in FIG. 25A is the eccentric cam in FIG. 25B). The position can be closer to the lever support shaft 331d1 than the position where the member 333 and the lever member 340 abut). In this case, if the same torque is applied to the lever member 340, the load generated at the position where the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other is reduced. Therefore, since the load applied to the eccentric cam member 333 can be reduced, the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that a large load may be applied to the eccentric cam member 333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310, so the eccentric cam member 333 is continuously rotated in the same direction. In this case, it is preferable to rotate the eccentric cam member 333 counterclockwise in FIG. In this case, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ2 in FIG. 25B, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 is suppressed (lever support shaft). 331d1 to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member becomes longer.) Even if the eccentric cam member 333 moves in the direction close to the lever member 340, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged. Can be lowered.

  On the other hand, when the rib portion 333e of the eccentric cam member 333 rotates within the angle range of the angle φ1 in FIG. 25A, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 increases (from the lever support shaft 331d1). The distance to the contact position between the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 is shortened). However, since the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated in a direction away from the lever member 340, the lever member 340 and the eccentric cam member 333 are The load generated on the eccentric cam member 333 at the contact position can be suppressed, and the durability of the eccentric cam member 333 can be improved. The eccentric cam member 333 does not need to be rotated in the same direction, and may be reciprocally rotated (reversed) on the angle φ1 side or the angle φ2 side.

  26A and 26B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 26A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 26A clockwise) from the state of FIG. 24B, and FIG. 26A illustrates the state where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 26A to the retracted phase and is swung until the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333, and the cross section of the swing operation member 310 is illustrated. Vision is omitted.

  Here, when the operation of pushing down the lever member 340 is obtained exclusively while the lever member 340 is swung by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the posture of the lever member 340 changes as shown in FIG. Without swinging, the swing operation member 310 does not normally swing in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 26 (a) clockwise). Therefore, by detecting that the back button member 312d has been pushed in, it is possible to detect that the player is performing an erroneous operation (an operation to lift the swing operation member 310).

  In this case, a load is applied to the eccentric cam member 333 through the lever member 340. Since the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged, the eccentric cam member 333 is damaged by driving the eccentric cam member 333 with the driving force of the drive gear 335b to the retracted phase as shown in FIG. Can be prevented.

  At this time, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated more safely by rotating the eccentric cam member 333 clockwise in FIG. That is, the eccentric cam member 333 can be rotated while the contact position between the eccentric cam member 333 and the lever member 340 is separated from the lever support shaft 331d1, and compared with the case where the eccentric cam member 333 is rotated counterclockwise. Thus, the load applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 333 can be suppressed.

  27A and 27B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 27A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state of FIG. 24A, and FIG. 27B shows a swing operation from the state of FIG. The state in which the member 310 is swung clockwise with respect to the shaft support rod 363 in FIG. 27A is shown, and the sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted.

  When a force is applied along the direction D1 shown in FIG. 27A from the state of FIG. 24A, the swing operation member 310 can be pushed down together with the lever member 340. Next, when a force is applied along the direction D2 which is the opposite direction of the direction D1 from the state shown in FIG. 27A, the posture of the lever member 340 remains unchanged, and the swing operation member 310 is pivoted about the pivot bar 363. It can be swung. In this way, a series of operations can be performed by reversing the direction of the force without requiring two types of operations (operations of different modes such as push-in and rotation). Can be easy.

  During this operation, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 function as rigid bodies (a state in which the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are fixed by the attraction force of the magnet member 354 is maintained). The operability of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the back button member 312d is pressed against the connecting portion 344c of the upper cover member 344, so that the lever member 340 is moved in the opposite direction to FIG. A load is applied in the clockwise direction. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 310 is swung, the lever member 340 can be easily fixed at the position of FIG. 27A, and the swing operation member 310 is held in the state of FIG. To make it easy to do.

  Next, an operation device 2300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the main body portion 333a and the cam portion 333c of the eccentric cam member 333 are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 has a central portion. The main body member 2333a that is pivotally supported and the cam member 2333b that is eccentrically pivotally supported are formed as separate members. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the second embodiment, an urging force acts in a direction in which the lever member 2340 is raised from the torsion spring SP21, and in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is rotated backward from the torsion spring SP22 (FIG. 28 (a) clockwise). Energizing force works.

  The torsion spring SP21 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts on the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 9) from the upper side, and the other end to the angle regulating rod member 346. Abutted from below. As a result, the lever member 2340 is biased in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is raised.

  The torsion spring SP22 is wound around and supported by the buffer member 364 (see FIG. 12), one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 2362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP22 urges the swinging member 2360 in the reverse direction (FIG. 28 (a) clockwise) with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIGS. 28A and 28B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 28A and 28B show a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and FIG. 28B shows a state from the state shown in FIG. 28A. The state where the swing operation member 310 is swung backward about the shaft support rod 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 28A is the initial position, and in FIG. 28A, the posture P21 where the swing operation member 310 is swung by the reaction of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is indicated by an imaginary line. Is done. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment. Since the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 2300, the operation device 2300 will be described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), the vibration device 2366 is a device that operates a pair of members close to and away from each other in a linear direction by electromagnetic force, and is fastened and fixed to a motor fixing plate 2362 and around it. A bobbin member 2366a that is a tubular member wound with a copper wire, a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a, and an inner diameter larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member 2366a And a pressing member 2366b that is arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate. The pressing member 2366b has an inner cylinder made of a magnetic material.

  The bobbin member 2366a and the pressing member 2366b are smaller in length in the radial direction than the bobbin member 366a and the pressing member 366b in the first embodiment, and the central axis C21 of the vibration device 2366 is on the front side from the shaft support bar 363 (FIG. 28). (A) It is spaced apart at the left side.

  Here, when the swing operation member 310 is provided as an operation portion at the tip of the lever member 2340 as in the present embodiment, the player may be required to hold it for production. However, it has been difficult to detect whether or not the player has held the swing operation member 310. For example, it is possible to request that the push button be pressed for a long time, but if you frequently use the operation of the push button, it is necessary to push the push button every time with a force greater than the reaction force of the push button. There is a risk of stress.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the central axis of the vibration device 2366 is spaced apart from the front side of the shaft support rod 363, the swinging member 2360 reciprocally swings due to the reaction of vibration of the vibration device 2366, and the neck The posture of the swing operation member 310 changes in such a manner that it swings back and forth between the posture shown in FIG. 28 (a) and the posture P21. Accordingly, before the player grasps the swing operation member 310, the back button member 312d reciprocates in the pushing direction (direction parallel to the central axis C21), and this is referred to as the second sensor member 313d (FIG. 20). In this case, it is possible to detect that the player is before gripping the swing operation member 310.

  On the other hand, when the player grips the swing operation member 310, the posture of the intermediate frame member 312 is fixed by the gripping force, and the back button member 312d does not reciprocate, so that the signal detected by the second sensor member 313d The pattern changes. By detecting this change, it can be detected that the player is after holding the swing operation member 310.

  When the swinging operation member 310 is gripped, there is no reaction force that is generated, so the force required for the player is small. Further, it is only necessary that the player's hand is placed on the swing operation member 310 (the player can immediately operate the swing operation member 310). For example, the player places his / her own weight on the intermediate frame member 312. It is only necessary to reduce the player's stress.

  Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether or not the player is holding the swing operation member 310 (whether or not the player is in a preparation stage for the operation) without requiring the player to operate the push button, so that the presentation is advanced. The timing can be set to the timing at which the player grips the swing operation member 310, and the player's stress caused by requesting the operation of the push button can be eliminated.

  When the connection between the lever member 2340 and the swinging member 2360 is a pivotal support, the vibration transmitted to the player is increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device 2366 with the rotation shaft of the swinging member 2360. be able to. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1). For this reason, there has been a problem in that the fastening screw is loosened or the member is deteriorated at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the vibration of the vibration device 2366 is used to rotate the swing operation member 310 by shifting the rotation axis of the swing member 2360 and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device 2366. The vibration transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) can be reduced (vibration energy is used to rotate the swing operation member 310). In addition, the lens member 317 can be vibrated while the swing operation member 310 is rotated by the vibration of the vibration device 2366, so that the effect can be improved.

  The rod-like member 2331d includes a lock releasing shaft 2331d5 (see FIG. 28A) that extends in parallel with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  FIG. 29A and FIG. 29B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 29A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down and disposed in the downward position with the lock member 2336 disposed on the release side. FIG. 29B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 has rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A to the rotation end in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29A).

  Since the swing operation member 310 is urged in the backward rotation direction (FIG. 29 (a) clockwise) by the torsion spring SP22, the swing operation member 310 is placed until the lever member 2340 is arranged at the lower end of the swing range. Is kept pressed against the upper cover member 344.

  From the state where the lever member 2340 is pushed down to the lower end of the swing range (see FIG. 29A), when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in a direction to further push down the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 It rotates in the forward direction (FIG. 29 (a) counterclockwise direction). Thus, the player can recognize the lower end of the push-down operation of the swing operation member 310, the end of the operation range of the swing operation member 310 is not known, and the player does not intend to overload the swing operation member 310. It is possible to prevent a load from being applied.

  In the present embodiment, the eccentric cam member 2333 that transmits the driving force to the lever member 2340 and the lock release cam member 2339 that swings the lock member 2336 toward the release side (see FIG. 29A) are both driven. It is rotated by the gear 335b. As a result, the second drive device 337 (see FIG. 10) can be dispensed with, and the product cost can be reduced. Hereinafter, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock release cam member 2339, and the lock member 2336 will be described.

  30 (a) is a front view of the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30 (b) is a side view of the cam member 2333b in the direction of arrow XXXb in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. 30C is a front view of the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. 30D is a side view of the main body member 2333a as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXd in FIG. In addition, in FIG.30 (c) and FIG.30 (d), the main body member 2333a is partially sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, the cam member 2333b includes a cylindrical portion 2333b1 pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10), and a circle inscribed in the cylindrical portion 2333b1. A cam portion 2333b2 that extends in the axial direction along the tube and is slightly shorter than the cylindrical portion 2333b1 and is hollow inside, and a pair of cutouts that are cut out along the axial direction at the tip of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 A notch 2333b3, a plate-like rib portion 2333b4 that connects the tubular portion 2333b1 and the cam portion 2333b2 in a direction passing through both axes, and a protruding projection parallel to the axial center of the tubular portion 2333b1 from the rib portion 2333b4. And a projecting portion 2333b5.

  The protruding portion 2333b5 is a protrusion that is disposed at a position spaced apart from the cylindrical portion 2333b1 by the length of the radius R21 and is inserted into the annular recess 2333a3 of the main body member 2333a, and is formed of a magnetic material. The rib portion 2333b4 is bonded with an adhesive or the like. The protruding portion 2333b5 has a curved surface shape in which side surfaces (upper and lower side surfaces in FIG. 30 (a)) arranged in a manner intersecting the radial direction of the cylindrical portion 2333b1 are in a circular shape centering on the cylindrical portion 2333b1. Formed with.

  The cylindrical portion 2333b1 corresponds to the cylindrical portion 333b, the cam portion 2333b2 corresponds to the cam portion 333c, the notch 2333b3 corresponds to the notch 333d, and the rib portion 2333b4 corresponds to the rib portion 333e. Since the technical idea is common, the description is omitted here.

  As shown in FIGS. 30C and 30D, the main body member 2333a is provided with a shaft hole 2333a2 having a circular cross section that is pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 10) at the center. A disc-shaped disc portion 2333a1 in which gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 10) are formed on the outer peripheral surface, and along the axial direction of the shaft hole 2333a2 from the front side of the disc portion 2333a1. An annular recess 2333a3 that is recessed in an annular shape and a fixed magnet portion 2333a4 in which a magnetic material is disposed in an annular shape along the outer peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3.

  In the annular recess 2333a3, the distance from the center of the shaft hole 2333a2 to the inner peripheral surface of the annular recess 2333a3 is the length of the radius R22, and the radial width is slightly larger than the thickness of the protruding portion 2333b5. In the present embodiment, the radius R22 is equal in length to the deformation R21 (radius R21 = radius R22). In addition, the concave depth of the annular concave portion 2333a3 is made longer than the convex length of the convex portion 2333b5.

  Here, since the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the annular recess 2333a3, when the projecting portion 2333b5 is disposed above the cylindrical portion 2333b1, the cam member 2333b is moved from the lever member 2340. When the overload is received, the cam member 2333b receives the load in a direction in which the protruding portion 2333b5 is released from the fixed magnet portion 2333a4. Thereby, it can prevent that the convex part 2333b5 is pressed against the fixed magnet part 2333a4, and can suppress that it deteriorates by rubbing magnets.

  FIG. 31 is an assembled view of the body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333, FIG. 31 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333, and FIG. FIG. 31A is a side view of the eccentric cam member 2333 as viewed in the direction of XXXIb, and FIG. 31C is a front view of the eccentric cam member 2333. FIG. 31C illustrates a state in which the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are relatively rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. In D12 (b), the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are partially viewed in cross section.

  As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, in the state where the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the protruding portion 2333b5 is circular. Magnetic forces in the direction of being attracted to each other between the convex portion 2333b5 and the fixed magnet portion 2333a4 are inserted into the annular concave portion 2333a3. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b can rotate together by the driving force transmitted from the driving gear 335b (see FIG. 10).

  At this time, since the shape of the projecting portion 2333b5 is formed by a curved surface along a circle centering on the cylindrical portion 2333b1, and the area contacting the side surface of the annular recess 2333a3 can be increased, the main body member 2333a and the cam The member 2333b can be firmly fixed.

  On the other hand, since the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b are merely attracted and fixed by magnetic force, when the cam member 2333b receives a load with a force greater than the attraction force, the cam member 2333b slides against the main body member 2333a. Can be made. That is, as shown in FIG. 31A, the main body member 2333a is moved from a state in which the reference line O representing the phase of the main body member 2333a and the straight line Q21 representing the phase of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b coincide with each other. By fixing and applying a load in the rotational direction to the cam member 2333b, the reference line O and the straight line Q21 can be shifted to a state shifted as shown in FIG. 31 (c).

  32 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 2339, and FIG. 32 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as viewed in the XXXIIb direction of FIG. 32 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocking cam member 2339 as viewed in the XXXIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the unlocking cam member 2339 is formed in the same size as the main body member 2333a of the eccentric cam member 2333, and has a main body in which gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 335b are formed on the outer peripheral surface. A portion 2339a, a shaft hole 2339b that is drilled in the center of the main body 2339a and through which the unlocking shaft 2331d5 is inserted, and extends radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 2339a. And a release portion 2339c formed with a length capable of coming into contact with the engaging portion 2666d of the lock member 2336, and a detection piece extending radially outward at a position of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the release portion 2339c. 2339d.

  The detection piece 2339d passes through a gap between detection sensors (not shown). Thereby, the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be detected.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of the lock member 2336, and FIG. 33B is a side view of the lock member 2336 as viewed in the XXXIIIb direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 33A and 33B, the lock member 2336 has a shape in which the gear portion 336d (see FIG. 10) is omitted. The lock member 2336 is a member that prevents the lever member 2340 from swinging, and has a plate-shaped main body portion 2336a that is formed in a substantially L-shaped bowl shape on the distal end side, and is drilled on the proximal end side of the main body portion 2336a. And a shaft support hole 2336b through which the lock shaft 331d3 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, a guide hole 2336c formed along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 2336b, and a lock release cam member of the main body 2336a And a locking portion 2336d that protrudes from the side of the side facing 2339 (the left side in FIG. 33B) above the shaft support hole 2336b (the tip of the L-shaped bowl-shaped portion).

  The main body 2336a has a large force for rotating the lock member 2336 when the side surface of the tip portion formed in an L-shaped bowl shape (the side surface contacting from the lower side of the lever member 2340) contacts the lever member 2340. It is considered as an embodiment.

  The guide hole 2336c is a long hole through which the auxiliary shaft 331d4 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the swing end of the lock member 2336 can be defined by the length of the guide hole 2336c.

  The locking portion 2336c is a portion that is pushed from the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 (see FIG. 32). Further, a torsion spring (not shown) is locked to the locking portion 2336c, and the lock member 2336 receives a biasing force from the beginning toward the fixed side (see FIG. 28A).

  34 and 35 are front views of the lever member 2340, the eccentric cam member 2333, the lock member 2336, and the lock release cam member 2339 illustrating in time series that the lever member 2340 swings as the drive gear 335b rotates. It is.

  34A shows a state in which the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336, and in FIG. 34B, the lock release cam member 2339 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 34A. FIG. 34C shows a state in which the lock member 2336 is rotated until it comes into contact with the lock member 2336. FIG. 34C shows a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 swings the lock member 2336 to the release side from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 34 (d), a state in which the lock release cam member 2339 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 34 (c) and the lock member 2336 is returned to the fixed position is shown.

  FIG. 35A shows a state in which the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 is in contact with the lever member 2340 on the side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion 2333b1 (side disposed at an angle of 180 degrees). 35 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of FIG. 35 (a) and the lever member 2340 is in contact with the lock member 2336 from above, and FIG. 35 (c) shows the state shown in FIG. The state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated from the state of (b) and the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, when the unlocking cam member 2339 needs to rotate by an angle θ21 until it comes into contact with the locking portion of the lock member 2336, the unlocking cam member 2339 has an angle θ21. Since the lever member 2340 is prevented from swinging until the state shown in FIG. 34 (b) is rotated, the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 cannot rotate. Therefore, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b, which rotate in synchronization with the lock release cam member 2339, rotate relative to each other by an angle θ21 from the state shown in FIG. 34 (a) (see FIG. 34 (b)).

  Thus, since the cam member 2333b can be rotated relative to the main body member 2333a, even when the eccentric cam member 2333 and the unlocking cam member 2339 are assembled out of phase, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333 is the lever member. It is possible to prevent the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 10) from being damaged by being dammed by 2340.

  After the lock release cam member 2339 rotates by the angle θ21, the lock release cam member 2339 starts moving the lock member 2336 to the release side, so that the regulation of the swing of the lever member 2340 is released. The lever member 2340 is swung by the rotation. In this case, the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b of the eccentric cam member 2333 are attracted by magnetic force and rotate integrally.

  When the release portion 2339c of the lock release cam member 2339 comes out above the lock member 2336 and the lock member 2336 returns to the fixed side (see FIG. 34D), the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 regardless of the timing thereafter. (FIG. 34 (a) right end portion) pushes the curved surface portion of the hook-shaped portion of the main body portion 2336a of the lock member 2336, thereby pushing the lock member 2336 to the release side and further lowering the rear end portion of the lever member 2340. Naturally swinging is regulated.

  Therefore, for example, when the player operates in the direction of lifting the swing operation member 310 and the rear end portion of the lever member 2340 is lowered, the lever member 2340 is positioned regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (FIG. 34 (d), The swing of the lever member 2340 is controlled to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336 (regardless of the posture of FIG. 35A or FIG. 35B).

  Here, as a countermeasure against a load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts and swings the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28), the eccentric cam member 2333 is formed of an elastic material such as rubber, and the member is elastic. A method of releasing the load by deforming can be considered. However, in this case, there is a problem that the member is sagged or the shape is changed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 when the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). Therefore, the cam member 2333b can be prevented from being damaged.

  That is, regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 (regardless of the posture of the lever member 2340 shown in FIG. 34D, FIG. 35A, or FIG. 35B), the swing operation member 310 (FIG. 28)), the lever member 2340 pushes the cam member 2333b (slids with respect to the main body member 2333a), and the lever member 2340 swings to the lower side of the hook-shaped portion of the lock member 2336. Oscillation is regulated by being moved.

  On the other hand, in this case, the cam member 2333b has the same posture (see FIG. 35C), but the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 is different (FIGS. 34D and 35A). Or refer to FIG. Therefore, the rotation angle of the drive gear 335b required until the lock member 2336 is moved to the release side again by the lock release cam member 2339 is different, and it becomes difficult to determine the drive start timing of the lever member 2340. was there.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched by detecting the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 with a detection sensor (not shown). That is, since the arrangement of the cam member 2333b when the lever member 2340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 2336 is fixed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 35 (c), the drive gear 335b is rotated and locked in this state. By rotating the release cam member 2339 to a predetermined phase (see FIG. 34B), the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the lock release cam member 2339 can be matched.

  Accordingly, the phase of the eccentric cam member 2333 and the phase of the unlocking cam member 2339 can be matched regardless of the timing at which the player lifts the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 28). The drive start timing can be easily matched.

  Next, the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (a) to 36 (c) are front views of the main body member 2361 of the swinging member 2360 shown in the axial view of the shaft support bar 363. FIG. 36A shows a state in which the main body member 2361 is oscillated and arranged at the end on the reverse side (see FIG. 28A), and FIG. 36B shows the state on the end on the forward side. A state (see FIG. 28B) in which the main body member 2361 is arranged in a swinging manner is illustrated. In FIG. 36C, the main body member 2361 is along the longitudinal direction of the long hole 2361f from the state shown in FIG. The state of being slid and moved is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the body member 2361 is a member that is coaxially supported by the shaft support bar 363 and coaxial with the shaft hole 341e (see FIG. 12), and the shape of the side wall portion 361a (see FIG. 12) is slightly deformed. The deformed side wall portion 2361a is formed, the long hole 2361f is formed along the extending direction of the fixed plate portion 361e from the shaft hole 361c, and the fixed plate portion 361e is extended from the upper end portion of the angle regulating hole 361d. And a long hole 2361g formed along the direction.

  As a result, the shaft support bar 363 and the regulation bar 365 are arranged so as not to enter the long holes 2361f and 2361g unless at least the main body member 2361 is swingably arranged at the terminal end on the forward rotation side. Therefore, the main body member 2361 performs only a swinging motion around the shaft support rod 363.

  Next, the motor fixing plate 2362 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) is a top view of the motor fixing plate 2362, FIG. 37 (b) is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 in the XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 37 (a), and FIG. FIG. 38 is a side view of the motor fixing plate 2362 showing a state in which the U-shaped member 2362d is slid from the state shown in FIG. 37 (b). In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 37 (b) and FIG. 37 (c), the outer shape of the main body member 2361 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the motor fixing plate 2362 includes a main body portion 2362a and a side wall portion 2362b formed by extending the main body portion 362a and the side wall portion 362b rearward (upward in FIG. 37), and the bottom of the main body portion 2362a. A pair of rod-like portions 2362c extending downward from the side, a U-shaped member 2362d formed on the rod-like portion 2362c so as to be slidable and formed with a crotch width larger than the width of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, Is mainly provided.

  The side wall portion 2362b includes a long hole 2362b1 formed along the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a.

  The U-shaped member 2362d is arranged such that the direction of the U-shaped crotch width is along the width direction of the long holes 2361f and 2361g, and is biased in a direction away from the main body 2362a by an elastic spring or the like (not shown). Is done. That is, when a load is not applied to the U-shaped member 2362d, the U-shaped member 2362d is disposed at the position shown in FIG. 37B, and the U-shaped leg portion overlaps the elongated holes 2361f and 2361g. The shaft support bar 363 and the regulation bar 365 can be prevented from moving along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  On the other hand, when a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d in a direction approaching the main body 2362a, the U-shaped member 2362d is disposed at the position shown in FIG. Since it overlaps with the long holes 2361f and 2361g, the shaft support bar 363 and the regulating bar 365 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  That is, it is possible to switch whether or not the main body member 2361 can be moved along the long holes 2361f and 2361g by switching whether or not a load is applied to the U-shaped member 2362d.

  Here, a member for sliding the U-shaped member 2362d will be described. In the present embodiment, the plate-like first release member 2370 that is slidably moved along the longitudinal direction inside the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 and the rear side frame member 311 of the swing operation member 310 are provided. It mainly includes a plate-like second release member 2380 that is disposed so as to be slidable in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the main body portion 2362a through the disposed through hole.

  The first release member 2370 is slidably disposed on the U-shaped member 2362d on the rear side (right side in FIG. 28A), and the second release member 2380 is disposed on the U side on the front side (left side in FIG. 28A). The character-shaped member 2362d is arranged to be slidable.

  Further, the first release member 2370 has the main body member 351 abuts against the end of the first release member 2370 and pushes the U-shaped member 2362d when the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the lever member 2340. Shaped. The second release member 2380 is configured such that the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and the swing member 2360 is rotated and disposed at the swing end in the forward rotation direction, so that the front cover 321 is disposed on the second release member 2380. The U-shaped member 2362d is pushed and abutted on the end portion.

  For example, in the state shown in FIG. 29B, the U-shaped member 2362d on the front side (left side in FIG. 29A) is slid, but the U-shaped member on the rear side (right side in FIG. 29A). Since 2362d is not slid, the swing operation member 310 cannot be slid downward.

  38A and 38B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 38A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state illustrated in FIG. FIG. 38B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g from the state illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, the peeling member 350 is pulled off from the main body member 341, and the swinging operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position and is rotated and disposed at the end of swinging in the forward rotation direction. Thus, the pair of U-shaped members 2362d are slid and the swing operation member 310 can be slid along the long holes 2361f and 2361g.

  At this time, the main body member 341 of the lever member 2340 is already overloaded by the peeling member 350 being peeled off, and the swinging operation member 310 swings to the lower end of the swing range. In addition, a downward force is applied to the swing operation member 310. Therefore, the player does not accidentally overload when operating the swing operation member 310, and may determine that the swing operation member 310 is about to be destroyed regardless of the operation. it can.

  Therefore, for example, a detection sensor (not shown) detects that the state shown in FIG. 38B has been reached, and an alarm is issued, thereby preventing the player from overloading the swing operation member 310. Thus, the operation device 2300 can be prevented from being destroyed.

  In addition, when an overload is not applied to the swing operation member 310, the swing operation member 310 can be prevented from sliding, so that the operation feeling of the swing operation member 310 is provided by the long holes 2361f and 2361g. It is possible to prevent the change.

  Next, an operation device 3300 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force for driving the lever member 340 is transmitted to the lever member 340 behind the lever support shaft 331d1 has been described. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment drives the lever member 3340. The driving force to be transmitted is transmitted in front of the lever support shaft 331d1. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the third embodiment, a biasing force acts in a direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward from the torsion spring SP31, and a biasing force acts in a direction in which the swing operation member 310 is tilted backward from the torsion spring SP32.

  The torsion spring SP31 is wound around the shaft support portions 331g and 332g (see FIG. 10), one end abuts on the torsion spring locking portions 331h and 332h (see FIG. 10) from the upper side, and the other end to the angle regulating rod member 346. It abuts from above. As a result, the lever member 340 is biased in the direction in which the swing operation member 310 is tilted forward.

  The torsion spring SP32 is wound around and supported by the buffer member 364, and one end is locked to the front curved surface portion 345c, and the other end is locked to the motor fixing plate 362. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring SP32 urges the swinging member 360 in the direction in which it rises with respect to the main body member 341.

  FIGS. 39A and 39B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 39 (a) and 39 (b) show a state in which the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336, and FIG. 39 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a). The state where the swing operation member 310 is swung forward about the shaft support rod 363 is illustrated. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 17A, the operation device 300 is illustrated, but since the appearance is the same, the operation device 3300 is regarded as being described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the operation device 3300 in this embodiment does not include the eccentric cam member 333, and the lever member 3340 is driven by a solenoid mechanism described later. Hereinafter, the solenoid mechanism will be described.

  The solenoid mechanism includes a magnetic member 3339 formed of a magnetic material disposed inside the inner cover member 3330, and a cylindrical rod-shaped metal member 3345f that is fixed to the lever member 3340 and is made of a cylinder. .

  The lower cover member 3345 of the lever member 3340 includes a pair of transmission portions 3345e that extend rearward and downward from the left and right ends of the back guide portion 345a and are molded integrally with the lower cover member 3345, and the transmission portion 3345e A metal rod-shaped member 3345f is fixed to the tip in a posture parallel to the lever support shaft 331d1, and a current is conducted to the rod-shaped member 3345f.

  The magnetic material 3339 is a U-shaped magnet extending from the front side wall of the inner cover member 3330 to the back side (right side in FIG. 39 (a)) in a pair. In the present embodiment, the upper arm portion 3339n disposed on the upper side is an N pole, and the lower arm portion 3339s disposed on the lower side is an S pole. The lower side surface of the upper arm portion 3339n and the upper side surface of the lower arm portion 3339s are arranged with a slight gap in the vertical direction from the trajectory in which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves as the lever member 3340 swings. Therefore, when the lever member 3340 is swung, it is possible to prevent the rod-shaped member 3345f from colliding with the magnetic member 3339.

  Here, for example, when a current is passed through the bar-shaped member 3345f toward the front side of FIG. 39A, an electromagnetic force that moves the bar-shaped member 3345f rearward (to the right of FIG. 39A) is generated. When a current is passed in the opposite direction, an electromagnetic force that moves the rod-shaped member 3345f forward (leftward in FIG. 39A) is generated. The lever member 3340 can be swung by these electromagnetic forces.

  FIG. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 40A shows a state in which the lock member 336 is disposed on the release side, the lever member 3340 is swung by the urging force, and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position.

  In the present embodiment, since the lever member 3340 is biased in the forward tilting direction by the torsion spring SP1, the lever member 3340 can start to swing by disposing the lock member 336 on the release side.

  When the lever member 3340 is biased in the forward tilt direction as in the present embodiment, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the lever member 3340 drives the lever member 3340 to the side closer to it. There is a problem that it is necessary to dispose the cam member, and the eccentric cam member is easily damaged by the player's operation.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the eccentric cam member is deleted, and the driving force is transmitted to the lever member 3340 by a solenoid mechanism. Since the magnetic member 3339 constituting the solenoid mechanism is disposed in a manner that leaves a slight gap from the movement locus of the rod member 3345f constituting the solenoid mechanism, it is possible to prevent the rod-like member 3345f and the magnetic member 3339 from colliding with each other. Then, when the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, the solenoid mechanism can be prevented from being damaged.

  FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 40B shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is pushed down from the state shown in FIG. 39B and the main body member 341 and the peeling member 350 are peeled off.

  Since the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), even if the player releases the hand from the state of FIG. The swing operation member 310 does not move up immediately and is maintained on the spot.

  Here, assuming that the direction of urging the lever member 340 is a rising direction, the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 and the lock member 336 is damaged when the player overloads the swing operation member 310. Even if the player can release the swinging operation member 310 as soon as the player releases his / her hand, the player does not realize that the player is overloading, and the swinging operation member 310 is repeatedly overloaded. There was a problem that there was a risk of applying.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the urging direction of the lever member 3340 is directed in the direction in which the lever member 3340 is tilted forward (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 40B), so that the swing operation member 310 is directed downward. Can continue to be placed in position. Thereby, the situation where a player repeatedly applies an overload to the swing operation member 310 can be avoided.

  In the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345f that receives the electromagnetic force that drives the lever member 3340 operates integrally with the main body member 341. In other words, in a state where the main body member 341 is separated from the peeling member 350, the main body member 341 can be swung by the bar-shaped member 3345f receiving electromagnetic force.

  Here, when a driving force is transmitted to the lever member 340 (see FIG. 10) by the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10), if the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the peeling member 350, the lock member 336 causes the lever member to move. When the swinging of 340 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 is also restricted simultaneously (see FIG. 18A). For this reason, there is a problem in that if the eccentric cam member 333 operates when the swing of the lever member 340 is restricted by the lock member 336, a load is applied to the lock member 336 and the lock member 336 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 3340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336, the rod-shaped member 3345f is moved by receiving electromagnetic force, so that the main body member 341 can swing. On the other hand, the driving force is not transmitted to the peeling member 350.

  Therefore, even if a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f when the rocking of the lever member 3340 is restricted by the lock member 336, the electromagnetic force generated at that time is used for the rocking of the main body member 341, and the rocking of the peeling member 350 Since it is not used for movement, it is possible to prevent the lock member 336 from being damaged.

  41 (a) and 41 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 41A shows a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the direction in which it rises from the state shown in FIG. 40B, and FIG. 41B shows the state shown in FIG. From this, a state in which the lever member 3340 is swung in the rising direction is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the main body member 341 of the lever member 3340 can be swung by the rod-shaped member 3345f being moved by receiving electromagnetic force. Here, when the eccentric cam member 333 (see FIG. 10) is disposed below the peeling member 350 and the lever member 3340 is driven by rotating the eccentric cam member 333, the lever member 340 is moved from the peeling member 350. The main body member 341 cannot be driven in a state where the main body member 341 is peeled off (see FIG. 23B).

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the driving force is not transmitted to the main body member 341 via the peeling member 350, but the electromagnetic force received by the rod-shaped member 3345f is transmitted to the main body member 341 via the transmission portion 3345e. The main body member 341 is driven. Therefore, even when the position of the peeling member 350 is fixed, the main body member 341 can be swung.

  A current is passed through the rod-like member 3345f from the state shown in FIG. 40B toward the back side of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 41 (a), the current flows from the state shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the rod-like member 3345f toward the back side of FIG. 41 (a) until the transmitting portion 3345e changes its posture by an angle α32. The main body member 341 can be in the state shown in FIG.

  By reversing the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f, the posture of the main body member 341 can be repeatedly changed between the state shown in FIG. 41A and the state shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to perform a rolling operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 3300.

  In addition, even in a state where the peeling member 350 is attracted and fixed to the main body member 341 (see FIG. 40A), the direction of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f is reversed so that the player can pay attention to the operation device 3300. The action can be performed. At this time, the path along which the rod-shaped member 3345f moves is the same as the path in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Therefore, the single magnetic member 3339 is used to pull the peeling member 350 from the main body member 341. This can correspond to the case where the peeling member 350 is adsorbed to the main body member 341.

  The weight balance in the longitudinal direction of the main unit member 341 changes between the state in which the peeling member 350 is adsorbed on the main body member 341 and the state in which the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the main body member 341. Even if the current is supplied, the speed of the turning operation can be varied. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  42A and 42B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 3300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 42 (a) and 42 (b), for easy understanding, the swing operation member 310 is shown in a side view without a cross-sectional view, and a player's hand is shown in an imaginary line. .

  FIG. 42A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position and the player's hand is covered from the back side of the swing operation member 310 (right side in FIG. 42A). From this state, when a current flows through the rod-shaped member 3345f toward the back of FIG. 42A, the rod-shaped member 3345f receives an electromagnetic force and swings in a direction in which the lever member 3340 rises. By swinging the lever member 3340, the swing operation member 310 is caught by the player's hand, and the swing operation member 310 swings in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42A). Thereby, the state of the back button member 312d changes, and it can be determined by the second sensor member 313d (see FIG. 20) whether or not there is an input operation from the player.

  In this case, the player can perform the input operation only by placing his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, and the input operation can be facilitated. In addition, the state of the back button member 312d changes depending on the mode (timing and strength) of flowing a current through the rod-shaped member 3345f (the swing operation member 310 on which the player is covering swings in the forward direction). Can be controlled. Therefore, the input of the back button 312d is controlled on the control side by controlling the direction and strength of the current flowing through the rod-shaped member 3345f by placing the hand on the swing operation member 310 without requiring the player to perform an input operation. The timing of the operation can be determined. Thereby, for example, when performing an effect that requires input in a timely manner, the burden on the player can be reduced.

  Further, for example, if the player places his / her hand on the lens member 317 without placing his / her hand on the back side of the swing operation member 310, the lever member 3340 is raised from the state shown in FIG. Even if it swings, the swing operation member 310 does not swing in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 42 (a)). Therefore, when there are a plurality of operation modes of the operation device 3300, an operation method for inputting with good timing can be designated, and the player can operate the operation device 3300 by an appropriate method.

  This is not possible with the configuration in which the eccentric cam member 333 is disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1 of the lever member 3340. For example, as in the present embodiment, the rod-shaped member 3345h is disposed on the front side of the lever support shaft 331d1. This effect is achieved for the first time by adopting a configuration in which the received electromagnetic force is transmitted and the main body member 341 is swung in the rising direction.

  Next, an operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the lock member 336 restricts the swing of the lever member 340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position has been described. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is The lock member 4336 restricts the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 43, the outer case member 320 is not shown and the inner case member 4330 is disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the inner case member 4330 includes a left cover member 4331 and a right cover member 4332 assembled in a box shape in which a lever member 4340 is disposed on the inside, and an eccentric cam projecting from the left cover member 4331. An eccentric cam member 4333 that is pivotally supported by the shaft 331d2 and a lock member 4336 that is pivotally supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 that protrudes from the left cover member 331 are mainly provided. The drive member insertion hole 332d and the second drive device 337 in the present embodiment are slightly different from the first embodiment in the arrangement and posture, but the technical idea of driving the lock member 4336 is different from that in the first embodiment. Since they are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

  Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the left cover member 4331 includes a plurality of rod-like members 4331d that are formed to protrude rightward from the upper side wall portion 331b and have a cylindrical shape.

  The rod-shaped member 4331d is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 disposed at the top of the left cover member 4331, the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 disposed below the lever support shaft 331d1, and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. And a lock shaft 4331d3.

  The lock shaft 4331d3 is a shaft through which the lock member 4336 is inserted, and is supported by the left cover member 4331 and the right cover member 4332 in both ends.

  Unlike the left cover member 331 in the first embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 includes a cam portion 4333c. The cam portion 4333c has the same configuration as the cam portion 333c, but the diameter of the eccentric cam is larger than that of the cam portion 333c. More specifically, the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position in a state where the end of the cam portion 4333c is aligned with the axis of the main body portion 333a and the maximum diameter portion of the cam portion 4333c is closest to the lever member 4340. The diameter of the eccentric cam is formed to a certain size.

  The lock member 4336 is arranged from the lower side with respect to the lock receiving member 4350 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the vicinity of the downward position and the side on which the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340 is disposed upward. It is a member that abuts and restricts the swinging of the lever member 4340.

  44 (a) is a front view of the lock member 4336, and FIG. 44 (b) is a side view of the lock member 4336 as viewed in the XXXIVb direction of FIG. 44 (a).

  The lock member 4336 has a main body member 4336a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission member 4336b formed in a fan-shaped plate shape and a driving force of the second driving device 337 transmitted by gear engagement. Is mainly provided.

  The main body member 4336a is formed in a main body portion 4336a1 formed in a long plate shape, and in the left-right direction (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction) of the main body portion 4336a1, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. Shaft support hole 4336a2, a locking portion 4336a3 protruding above the shaft support hole 4336a2 from the side surface opposite to the transmission member 4336b of the main body portion 4336a1, and a side surface of the main body portion 4336a1 facing the transmission member 4336b. And a recessed portion 4336a4 that is recessed from the back side (right side of FIG. 44B) to the front side below the shaft support hole 4336a2.

  The locking portion 4336a3 is a portion where the other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3 and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c (see FIG. 45). Thereby, the main body member 4336a is always urged counterclockwise in FIG.

  The recessed portion 4336a4 is a portion that comes into contact with the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b. When the depth of the recessed portion 4336a from the back side is equal to or greater than the thickness of the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b, the main body member when the main body member 4336a is in the lock standby state (see FIG. 45 (a)). The posture of 4336a can be defined from the relationship between the main body member 4336a and the connecting side wall portion 331c (maintaining the posture while the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c).

  The transmission member 4336b has a main body portion 4336b1 formed in a sector fan shape and formed with a gear portion engaged with the drive gear 337b on the curved surface portion, and in the left-right direction of the main body portion 4336b1 (FIG. 44 (a) left-right direction). A shaft support hole 4336b2 through which the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted, a plate-shaped detection piece 4336b3 that can detect the attitude of the transmission member 4336b through a gap between sensor members (not shown), and a main body And a convex portion 4336b4 that is convex from the side surface of the portion 4336b1 facing the main body member 4336a and that abuts against the concave portion 4336a4 in the swinging direction of the main body portion 4336b1.

  The projecting portion 4336b4 is formed at the rear side end of the main body portion 4336b1. Thus, by swinging the transmission member 4336b in the direction to approach the connecting side wall portion 331c, the back side surface of the main body member 4336a that is swung by the urging force of the torsion spring SP41 can be brought into contact with the connecting side wall portion 331c. it can.

  FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B are side views of the lock member 4336. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the drive gear 337b and the connecting side wall portion 331c are illustrated in an assembled state.

  The lock member 4336 can be configured in a lock standby state shown in FIG. 45A and a lock forced release state shown in FIG. The lock standby state means a state in which the transmission member 4336b is disposed in proximity to the connection side wall portion 331c and the main body member 4336a is in contact with the connection side wall portion 331c.

  Further, the lock forcibly released state means that the drive gear 337b is rotated from the lock standby state and the transmission member 4336b is swung away from the connection side wall portion 331c so that the main body member 4336a faces the lever member 4340. This means that the end portion is disposed at a position where it does not contact the lever member 4340. In the lock forcibly released state, the protruding portion 4336b4 of the transmission member 4336b contacts the recessed portion 4336a4 and maintains the posture of the main body member 4336a.

  When the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the main body member 4336a in the lock standby state, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be restricted by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A). If the swing of the lever member 4340 is changed from the restricted state to the lock forcibly released state, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 is released and the lever member 4340 is made swingable (see FIG. 48).

  Here, by setting the lock standby state again (by rotating the drive gear 337b and rotating the transmission member 4336b clockwise in FIG. 6A), as described later, the lock member 4336 of the lever member 4340 is contacted. As the contacting end moves over the lock member 4336 upward, the swing of the lever member 4340 can be automatically restricted. On the other hand, maintaining the lock forcibly released state can prevent the swing of the lever member 4340 from being restricted.

  FIG. 46 is an exploded front perspective view of the lever member 4340 and the swing operation member 310. The lever member 4340 includes a main body member 4341 formed of a metal material such as iron and formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a lock receiving member 4350 that is coaxially supported by the shaft hole 341b of the main body member 4341, It is mainly composed of.

  The main body member 4341 is formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section and has a front main body portion 4341a having a notch on the left side of the rear end (left side in FIG. 46) and a notch of the front main body portion 4341a1. The rear main body portion 4341a2 having an L-shaped cross section, and an electromagnet member M41 that adsorbs the rear main body portion 4341a2 and the front main body portion 4341a1 only when the current is conducted and fastened to the upper surface side of the rear main body portion 4341a2. And a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the front main body portion 4341a1.

  The lock receiving member 4350 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that is elongated in the front-rear direction and is fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the rear main body portion 4341a2 of the lever member 4340, and in the left-right direction at the front end portion of the main body portion 4351. And a shaft hole 4352 that is coaxial with the shaft hole 341b and supported by the lever support shaft 331d1 (see FIG. 43). Therefore, the rear main body portion 4341a2 can swing around the lever support shaft 331d1 independently of the front main body portion 4341a1, which will be described later.

  47A and 47B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336, and FIG. 47 (b) shows the neck from the state shown in FIG. 47 (a). A state in which the swing operation member 310 is swung rearward about the shaft support rod 363 (see FIG. 46) is illustrated, and a cross-sectional view of the swing operation member 310 is omitted. In the present embodiment, the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 17A, the operation device 300 is illustrated, but since the external appearance is the same, the operation device 4300 is regarded as being described. Hereinafter, the same applies to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), as in the first embodiment, the swing operation member 310 is swung and the back button member 312d is pushed in while the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted. Can do.

  In this embodiment, since the lock member 4336 is in contact with the lever member 4340 from the lower side behind the lever support shaft 331d1, the lock member 4336 resists the erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 with the strength of the lock member 4336. Can do.

  The rear end portion of the lever member 4340 abuts behind the lock member 4336 and the lock shaft 4331d3, thereby suppressing the lock member 4336 from swinging toward the lock forcibly released state (see FIG. 45B). can do. Accordingly, a load can be applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 4336 in the direction in which the lock member 4336 is tilted forward (leftward in FIG. 47A), and the posture of the lock member 4336 can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, the eccentric cam member 4333 can be separated from the lever member 4340 in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 from being damaged when the eccentric cam member 4333 rotates due to a malfunction or the like while the rocking of the lever member 4340 is restricted by the lock member 4336. it can.

  FIG. 48 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 48 illustrates a state in which the lock member 4336 is in a lock forced release state and the lever member 4340 starts to swing.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the lock member 4336 is brought into the lock forcibly released state from the state where the lever member 4340 is prevented from swinging by the lock member 4336 (see FIG. 47A), the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 As a result, the lever member 4340 swings in the direction in which it rises (clockwise in FIG. 48).

  This can prompt the player to operate the operation device 4300, but the swinging speed of the lever member 4340 is determined by the urging force of the torsion spring SP1, and does not change every time, so the degree of freedom in performance is reduced. There was a problem that.

  The operation speed can be varied by changing the posture of the eccentric cam member 4333 in contact with the lever member 4340 in various ways and interlocking the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the swing of the lever member 4340. However, when the lever member 4340 accidentally collides with the eccentric cam member 4333 at a high speed, the eccentric cam member 4333 may be damaged. Therefore, the third sensor member 325a3 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase (see FIG. 49 (a)) when the lock member 4336 is swung toward the lock forcibly released state. It is preferable that it is detected after.

  Here, the reaction of vibration of the vibration device 366 included in the swing operation member 310 acts in a direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward along the straight line L1. Thus, for example, by vibrating the vibration device 366 while the lever member 4340 is swung in the direction in which the lever member 4340 rises (clockwise in FIG. 48), the lever member 4340 can be pushed back in the forward tilting direction. The swing speed and swing mode of the member 4340 can be changed (can be slowed down). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can be prevented from accidentally colliding with the eccentric cam member 4333 at high speed.

  49A and 49B are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 taken along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 49A shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position, and in FIG. 49B, the swing operation member 310 is rearward from the state in FIG. 49 (a) (right direction) is shown, and the swinging operation member 310 is not shown in cross section.

  49 (a) and 49 (b), the lock member 4336 is maintained in the lock forcibly released state. Therefore, for example, even if the player performs an operation of holding the swing operation member 310 and moving it up and down from the state shown in FIG. 49A, the swing of the lever member 4340 is not restricted by the lock member 4336. When the person releases the hand, the swing operation member 310 is returned to the upward position by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1.

  50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 4300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the state in which the lever member 4340 is swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 4333 is illustrated in time series. The

  FIG. 50A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is in the retracted phase, the lever member 4340 is in contact with the eccentric cam member 4333, and the lock member 4336 is in the lock standby state. ) Shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 50 (a) by about 90 degrees from the state of FIG. 50 (a).

  In FIG. 51A, the eccentric cam member 4333 further rotates in the same direction from the state of FIG. 50B, and the lever member 4340 is in contact with the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the swinging thereof is restricted. FIG. 51B shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 4333 is further rotated in the same direction from the state of FIG. 51A to be in the retracted phase (see FIG. 50A).

  As shown in FIGS. 50 (a), 50 (b), 51 (a), and 51 (b), the operation device 4300 is pushed down by the player after the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position. Even when the operation is not performed, by swinging the lever member 4340 by the eccentric cam member 4333, the swing operation member can be moved to the downward position (initial position).

  The lock member 4336 is placed in a lock standby state. In this case, when the lever member 4340 pushes the left side surface of the lock member 4336, the lock member 4336 rotates in a direction in which the lock member 4336 tilts backward (see FIG. 50B). On the other hand, the lock member 4336 is always urged in the direction to be tilted forward by the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Therefore, when the lever member 4340 moves to above the lock member 4336, the urging force causes (See FIG. 51 (a)). In this manner, in the process of swinging the lever member 4340, the lock member 4336 automatically regulates the swing of the lever member 4340.

  For this reason, even when the timing at which the player pushes down the swing operation member 310 is unknown, the swing member 4340 is placed in the downward position so that the lock member 4336 restricts the swing of the lever member 4340. It can be done reliably.

  In the arrangement in which the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 51A), the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is brought into contact with the lever member 4340. Therefore, in a state where the swing of the lever member 4340 is regulated by the lock member 4333 (see FIG. 51A), the eccentric cam member 4333 is not rotated backward and returned, but is kept rotating in the same direction. The member 4333 can be returned to the retracted phase. Therefore, a detection device that detects the timing of rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in reverse can be omitted, and the first drive device 335 that drives the eccentric cam member 4333 can be easily controlled.

  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 4300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. The outer shapes of the lever member 4340, the swing operation member 310, and the eccentric cam member 4333 in the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 52, when the eccentric cam member 4333 is reciprocally rotated about the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 at an angle θ41, the lever member 4340 can be reciprocally swung about the lever support shaft 331d1 at an angle θ42. As a result, it is possible to perform a turning operation that causes the player to pay attention to the operation device 4300.

  At this time, the cam portion 4333c of the eccentric cam member 4333 is reciprocally rotated in a state where the cam portion 4333c is disposed on the opposite side of the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the position from the contact position between the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lever member 4340 to the lever support shaft 331d1. The distance can be kept long. Accordingly, the driving force necessary to swing the lever member 4340 can be suppressed (the driving force may be small), and the load applied from the lever member 4340 to the eccentric cam member 4333 can be suppressed (overload). Can withstand).

  Further, when the lock member 4336 is in the lock forcibly released state, when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung, the lever member 4340 can be prevented from being loaded, and the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotated. Therefore, the driving force generated by the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 43) can be suppressed.

  53 (a) is a top view of the main body member 4341 and the lock receiving member 4350 of the lever member 4340. FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) show the lever member as viewed in the LIIIb direction of FIG. 53 (a). 4 is a side view of a main body member 4341 and a lock receiving member 4350 of 4340. FIG. FIG. 53 (c) illustrates a state in which the front main body portion 4341a1 is swung in a direction away from the electromagnet member M41 from the state of FIG. 53 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are adsorbed by the electromagnet member M41. Therefore, the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 are integrally swung unless a load equal to or greater than the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 is applied to the main body member 4341.

  On the other hand, the electromagnet member M41 loses its attractive force when the current conduction stops. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off, the relative position (angle) between the front main body portion 4341a1 and the rear main body portion 4341a2 changes (see FIG. 53C).

  54 (a) and 54 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 as viewed in section along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. In FIG. 6, the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment are illustrated. However, since the external appearance is the same as the pachinko machine 4010 and the operation device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. Description will be made assuming that 4010 and the operation device 4300 are illustrated.

  Here, in the operation device 4300, the protrusion length of the swing operation member 310 to the front side changes depending on whether the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position or the downward position. That is, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 54B, the swing operation member 310 is projected to the front side by the distance X41 in the state shown in FIG.

  In this case, since the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 4010 is smaller in the state shown in FIG. 54B, for example, when selecting a box for packing the pachinko machine 4010, it is shown in FIG. The box can be made smaller by selecting based on the state. On the other hand, when the lever member 4340 is fixed in the shape of a straight bar and the power is turned off with the lock member 4336 restricted from swinging, the swinging operation member 310 can be applied even if external force is applied to the swinging operation member 310. There was a problem that 310 could not be placed in the upward position, and the pachinko machine 4010 could not be put in the packing box.

  In addition, if the width of the line is determined by the width of the pachinko machine 4010 in a state where the swing operation member 310 is placed in the upward position on a factory inspection line or the like, the swing operation member 310 is erroneously placed in the downward position. There is a problem that the swinging operation member 310 may collide with the inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line in such a state.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the attractive force of the electromagnet member M41 that integrates the main body member 4341 of the lever member 4340 is lost when the power is turned off. Therefore, by turning off the power, regardless of whether or not the lock receiving member 4350 is in contact with the lock member 4336, the urging force of the torsion spring SP1 swings the front main body portion 4341a1 of the lever member 4340 in the rising direction. The swing operation member 310 can be disposed in an upward position.

  Thereby, the swing operation member 310 can be reliably arranged in the upward position at the time of packing. Further, by turning off the power when the pachinko machine 4010 is passed through the inspection line, it is possible to prevent the swing operation member 310 from colliding with the inspection machine or the like.

  Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. Although the case where the eccentric cam member 4333 and the lock member 4336 are driven independently has been described in the fourth embodiment, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment has a single drive motor 335a having the single eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336. Are driven synchronously. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a front exploded perspective view of the inner case member 5330 in the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 55, the right cover member is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the inner case member 5330 includes an eccentric cam member 5333 that is pivotally supported by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, and a cylindrical unlocking shaft that is disposed behind the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 with a drive gear 335b interposed therebetween. 5331d5, a lock release cam member 5339 supported by the lock release shaft 5331d5, and a lock member 5336 supported by the lock shaft 4331d3 are mainly provided.

  56 (a) is a front view of the eccentric cam member 5333, FIG. 56 (b) is a bottom view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIb direction of FIG. 56 (a), and FIG. FIG. 57 is a side view of the eccentric cam member 5333 as viewed in the LVIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the eccentric cam member 5333 mainly includes a cam portion 5333c having a substantially D shape in front view and an umbrella portion 5333f in which a notch 5333f1 is partially disposed.

  The cam portion 5333c is formed in a substantially D shape when viewed from the front, is linearly extended to the end portion of the maximum diameter of the eccentric cam member 5333, and has a rigid portion 5333c1 having high rigidity, and is rigid compared to the rigid portion 5333c1. And a buffer portion 5333c2 that reduces the impact from the lever member 4340. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the rigid body portion 5333c1 in the front view is set to approximately three times the thickness of the buffer portion 5333c2 in the front view.

  The notch 5333f1 of the umbrella portion 5333f is a notch formed to have a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when it is opposed to the drive gear 355b. The notch 5333f1 corresponds to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333. Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are operated synchronously by a single drive motor 335a (see FIG. 55), the posture of the lever member 4340 is detected and only one of the lock member 5336 or the eccentric cam member 5333 is detected. Therefore, there is a problem that the phases of the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 must be matched in advance.

  In this embodiment, since the notch 5333f1 is disposed in the umbrella portion 5333f, the initial phase of the eccentric cam member 5333 can be easily determined using the notch 5333f1 as a mark.

  When the umbrella portion 5333f is disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion 333a (downward in FIG. 56B), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, the eccentric cam member 5333 cannot be inserted when the umbrella portion 5333f hits the drive gear 335b when the eccentric cam member 5333 is inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2.

  That is, since the eccentric cam member 5333 can be inserted into the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 only in a posture in which the notch 5333f1 is opposed to the drive gear 335b, the eccentric cam member 5333 can be assembled in a correct posture.

  57 (a) is a front view of the unlocking cam member 5339, and FIG. 57 (b) is a bottom view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIb direction of FIG. 57 (a). ) Is a side view of the unlocking cam member 5339 as viewed in the LVIIc direction of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the unlocking cam member 5339 is formed in the same size as the main body portion 333a of the eccentric cam member 5333, and the gear teeth meshed with the drive gear 335b (see FIG. 59) on the outer peripheral surface. A main body 5339a formed with a shaft, a shaft hole 5339b that is drilled in the center of the main body 5339a and through which the unlocking shaft 5331d5 is inserted, and radially outward along the front side surface of the main body 5339a. A release portion 5339c that is extended and formed with a length capable of contacting the locking portion 4336a3 of the lock member 5336, and a disk-shaped umbrella portion 5339d that covers the gear portion on the front side of the main body portion 5339a, Prepare mainly.

  The umbrella portion 5339d includes a notch 5339d1 that is partially cut from the outer peripheral surface toward the shaft side. The notch 5339d1 of the umbrella portion 5339d is a notch that is formed in a size that allows the drive gear 355b to be pulled out in the axial direction when it is disposed opposite to the drive gear 355b, and corresponds to the drive gear 355b (see FIG. 55). This is a mark for adjusting the initial phase of the unlocking cam member 5339.

  When the umbrella portion 5339d is disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion 5339a (downward in FIG. 57B), the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55) is fastened and fixed to the left cover member 4331 (see FIG. 55). In this state, when the umbrella portion 5339d hits the drive gear 335b when the unlock cam member 5339 is inserted into the unlock shaft 5331d5, the unlock cam member 5339 cannot be inserted.

  That is, the unlocking cam member 5339 can be inserted into the unlocking shaft 5331d5 only in a posture in which the notch 5339d1 is opposed to the drive gear 335b, so that the unlocking cam member 5339 can be assembled in a correct posture.

  58 (a) is a front view of the lock member 5336, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the lock member 5336 as viewed in the LVIII direction of FIG. 58 (a). As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the lock member 5336 is configured by a member formed in a long plate shape, and a transmission member 4336b (FIG. 44) formed in a fan-shaped plate shape in cross section. Is unnecessary.

  The lock member 5336 has a main body member 5336a formed in a long plate shape, and is drilled in the left-right direction (FIG. 58 (a) left-right direction) of the main body member 5336a, and the lock shaft 4331d3 (see FIG. 43) is inserted. And a locking portion 5336c protruding above the shaft support hole 5336b from the side surface (the left side in FIG. 58 (a)) of the main body member 5336a facing the lock release cam member 5339. Prepare for.

  The locking portion 5336c is fixed to the lock shaft 4331d3, and one arm portion is locked to the connecting side wall portion 331c. The other arm portion of the torsion spring SP41 is locked and the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 57). It is a part pushed from the release part 5339c.

  The main body member 5336a has a curved wall portion 5336a1 that is curved along the locus of the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 on the side surface that comes into contact with the lever member 4340 when the lock member 5336 is in a lock standby state, A projecting portion 5336a2 that mainly projects along a circle centering on the shaft support hole 5336b from the upper end portion of the curved wall portion 5336a1 to the side close to the lever member 4340 is mainly provided.

  The projecting portion 5336a2 is inclined upward as the lower end surface approaches the tip. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the lever member 4340 from being caught (locked) by the protruding portion 5336a2. Therefore, the driving force of the first driving device 335 that generates the driving force for driving the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333 can be suppressed.

  59A and 59B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 representing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, and the lock release cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. 59A shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 59B, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59A. When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state where the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the lever member 4340 can be swung from the initial position before the driving force is applied to the lever member 4340 via the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 5333 from being damaged by the player operating the swing operation member 310 immediately after the swing operation member 310 moves. For example, when the swing operation member 310 starts moving from the initial position, even if the player performs an operation to swing the swing operation member 310 up and down, the lever member 4340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 5333. The collision between the cam member 5333 and the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

  This is a problem that cannot be avoided in the case where the swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted with the swing operation member 310 placed in the upward position (for example, in the case of the first embodiment). As in the embodiment, this is solved by restricting the swing of the lever member 4340 in a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position.

  Even when the player does not grip the swing operation member 310, the eccentric cam member 5333 is mechanically positioned when the lock member 5336 cancels the swing restriction (see FIG. 59B). Therefore, the lever member 4340 can reliably contact the lever member 4340 at a specific position of the eccentric cam member 5333 (a position on the short diameter side, a position on the opposite side of the cam portion 5333c).

  As shown in FIG. 59B, when the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released and the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the eccentric cam member 5333 has the cylindrical portion 333b with the lever. The posture closest to the member 4340 is taken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cam member 5333c from being damaged when the lever member 4340 collides with the cam portion 5333c.

  Further, since the cam portion 5333c is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the swing of the lever member 4340 immediately after the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released. The angle (movement amount) can be secured to the maximum. That is, in this embodiment, the locking member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are operated in synchronization, and immediately after the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, the swing angle ( This is a mode of synchronization in which the maximum amount of movement is ensured. Thereby, when the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, a large amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 17B) can be secured, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 is achieved. Can be improved.

  60A and 60B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 5333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 showing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, and the unlock cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336. In FIG. 60 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 59 (b), the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 60B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60A, and the rear end of the lever member 4340 is a curved wall of the lock member 5336. A state of sliding with the part 5336a1 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved by swinging the lever member 4340 on the side surface of the rigid portion 5333c1.

  Here, when the major axis portion of the circular eccentric cam hits from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam of the lever member 4340, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the eccentric cam collides with the lever member 4340, it is preferable that the large-diameter portion does not contact the operation member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the lever member 4340 and the eccentric cam member 5333 come into contact with each other, the rocking speed of the operation member is increased by swinging the operation member at the large outer diameter portion (outward in the radial direction). Because it can be large, the production effect can be improved.

  In the case of synchronous driving, the timing at which the lever member 4340 collides with the eccentric cam member 5333 can be mechanically adjusted. Accordingly, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 5333, the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be slightly retracted, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 can be brought into contact with the lever member 4340 at the timing after the collision. The speed of operation can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 60A and the state shown in FIG. 60B (by switching the rotation direction of the drive gear 335b alternately). The swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the tip of the lever member 4340 can be swung back and forth.

  Here, when the lock member 5336 is driven alone, the lock member 4336 is forcedly released (see FIG. 48) in a state where the lever member 4340 is swung up and down, and the lock member 5336 is operated by a player or an eccentric cam member. When the lever member 4340 is pushed up by 4333 and swings in a direction in which the lever member 4340 is tilted forward and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position, the lock member 4336 is placed in the lock standby state. Oscillation can be restricted.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress resistance from being applied from the lock member 4336 to the lever member 4340 in a state in which the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung up and down (see FIG. 52), which is necessary for the first driving device 335 (see FIG. 55). The driving force can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the lock member 5336 and the eccentric cam member 5333 are synchronously controlled, the posture of the member that drives the lock member 5336 (the lock release cam member 5339 in this embodiment) depends on the posture of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, particularly when the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position by being operated by the player, it may be difficult to immediately place the lock member 5336 in the lock standby state.

  For example, when the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed on the opposite side of the lock member 5336, it is necessary to rotate the lock member 5336 halfway before the release portion 5339c starts to push the lock member 5336. Therefore, it is difficult to swing the lock member 5336 according to the player's operation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lock member 5336 is always in the lock standby state in the state shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b). As a result, the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower surface of the lever member 4340 whenever the player operates to swing the lever member 4340 in a forward tilting direction and the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. Then, swinging of the lever member 4340 is restricted (see FIG. 62).

  However, when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333, when the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the lock member 5336, the lever member 4340 receives resistance from the lock member 5336 and a driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 5333 is generated. There is a risk of becoming excessive.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the curved wall portion 5336a1 formed in the lock member 5336 causes the lock member 5336 to escape from the lever member 4340 when the lever member 4340 is reciprocally swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 5333. Therefore, the resistance applied from the lock member 5336 to the lever member 4340 can be suppressed.

  Further, when the lever member 4340 swings in the forward tilt direction from the state shown in FIG. 60B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and the lock member 5336 is directed to the unlocked state side. (The clockwise direction in FIG. 60 (a)), the lever member 4340 moves above the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 returns to the biasing direction, and the lock member 5340 enters the lock standby state. Oscillation is restricted.

  Therefore, it is possible to restrict the swing direction of the lever member 4340 at an arbitrary timing while suppressing the resistance when the lever member 4340 is swung back and forth.

  The unlocking cam member 5339 transmits a driving force to the locking member 5336 only when the locking member 5336 is in the unlocked state (see FIG. 59B), and otherwise the locking member 5336 has a driving force of the locking member 5336. The transmission is canceled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is reciprocally swung, it is possible to prevent the lock member 5336 from operating in conjunction with the lever member 4340 and causing problems such as collision.

  As shown in FIG. 60 (a), until the lock member 5336 is arranged at the lock standby position, the lever member 4340 is in the posture in which the swing operation member 310 is arranged in the upward position (posture in FIG. 59 (b)). To maintain.

  Here, when the eccentric cam member 5333 and the lock member 5336 are synchronously controlled, the lock member 5336 is moved from the unlocked state (see FIG. 59 (b)) to the lock standby state (see FIG. 60 (a)). Therefore, the eccentric cam member 5333 may cause the lever member 4340 to swing. In this case, there is a problem that the swing operation member 310 cannot be maintained in the upward position in the lock standby state.

  In the present embodiment, since the rigid body portion 5333c1 is formed in a straight line in contact with the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 333b (see FIG. 60A), the eccentric cam member 5333 is viewed from a posture at a predetermined angle (FIG. 59B). 60 (a)), the gap between the rigid body portion 5333c1 and the lever member 4340 remains filled, and the lever member 4340 can be prevented from swinging. Thus, the swing operation member 310 can be maintained in the upward position while the lock member 5336 is changed from the unlocked state to the lock standby state.

  61A and 61B are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 61A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 60B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. 61 (b) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 5333 has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a) and has been rotated to the position where the upper surface of the lock member 5336 contacts the lower surface of the lever member 4340. The

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 5333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted on the upper surface of the lock member 5336.

  Until the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 comes into contact with the projecting portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336, the lock member 5336 is caused to escape from the lever member 4340 by the curved wall portion 5336a1, so that the lock member 5336 is locked to the lever member 4340. It is set as the structure which can suppress the resistance applied from an iron.

  In addition, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and thus the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The locking member 5336 can enter the lower part of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B), and a large speed can be secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably regulated.

  62 is a schematic diagram of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 5333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. 62 shows a state where the player has pushed down the lever member 4340 from the state shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), a circumscribed circle C 41 of the cam portion 5333 c centering on the cylindrical portion 333 b of the eccentric cam member 5333 is in contact with the lower surface of the lever member 4340. Therefore, it is not necessary to return the eccentric cam member 5333 in the opposite direction (clockwise in FIG. 62) in a state where the swing operation member 310 is operated by the player and is disposed at the downward position, and the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction ( The eccentric cam member 5333 can be returned to the initial position (see FIG. 59A) by rotating it counterclockwise in FIG.

  60B, even when the player does not push down the lever member 4340 in the direction to tilt forward, the eccentric cam member 5333 is moved in the same direction (reverse to FIG. 62) from the state shown in FIG. The lever member 4340 is swung by rotating it clockwise, and the lock member 5336 is brought into contact with the lower side of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B) to restrict the swing of the lever member 4340. Can do.

  Thereby, after the lock member 5336 is brought into the unlocked state, the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the downward position regardless of whether or not the player performs an operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the fifth embodiment, when the lock member 5336 is in the unlocked state, the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed below the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that the swinging width of the lever member 4340 is ensured. In the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment, the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the cam portion 5333c is disposed above the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 when the lock member 5336 is unlocked. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  63 (a) and 63 (b) show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member representing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339 and the lock member 5336 in the sixth embodiment in time series. 6333 is a schematic diagram of a lock release cam member 5339 and a lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 63A shows a state in which the lever member 4340 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 5336. In FIG. 63B, the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63A. When the lock release cam member 5339 pushes the lock member 5336, the restriction of the swing of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 is released, and the state where the lever member 4340 is swung in the rising direction (clockwise) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the eccentric cam member 6333 has an unlock cam member 5339 in a posture in which the cam portion 5333c faces the lever member 4340 side immediately before the unlock cam member 5339 comes into contact with the lock member 5336. Accordingly, the notch 6333f1 of the umbrella portion 6333f is recessed in a different arrangement from that of the fifth embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b), when the lock member 5336 is unlocked, the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lever member 4340 immediately come into contact with each other. It swings following the rotation of the member 6333. Therefore, according to the method of synchronizing the operations of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the lock release cam member 5339 in this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to recognize the timing of releasing the restriction of the lock member 5336.

  Further, since the swing speed of the lever member 4340 depends on the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333, the swing speed of the lever member 4340 can be arbitrarily set immediately after the lock member 5336 is released. Thereby, the freedom degree of design of the rocking speed of the lever member 4340 can be improved, and the effect of moving the swing operation member 310 up and down can be improved.

  FIGS. 64A and 64B show a lever member 4340, an eccentric cam member 6333, an unlock cam member 5339, and a lock member 5336 showing the operations of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, and the unlock cam. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a member 5339 and a lock member 5336.

  In FIG. 64 (a), the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 63 (b), and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 is disposed above the locking portion 5336c of the lock member 5336. 64B shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64A, and the rigid body portion 5333c1 of the eccentric cam member 6333 is below the lever member 4340. A state of contacting the side surface is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, when the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 is disposed on the opposite side of the lever member 4340 with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 interposed therebetween, the lever member 4340 is disposed. Is rocked by the eccentric cam shaft 331d2. Therefore, there is no possibility that the cam portion 5333c and the lever member 4340 collide with each other. Even when the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 is increased, an overload is generated when the lever member 4340 and the cam portion 5333c collide with each other. The eccentric cam member 6333 is not damaged.

  Therefore, by increasing the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 6333 only between FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the lever member 4340 is in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a) (the rear end of the lever member 4340 is at its maximum). It is possible to shorten the period of time that is set at the lower end). Thereby, since the period during which the lever member 4340 is in the state of FIG. 64A can be arbitrarily set, the degree of freedom in designing the swing operation of the lever member 4340 can be improved.

  FIGS. 65A and 65B are schematic views of the lever member 4340, the eccentric cam member 6333, the lock release cam member 5339, and the lock member 5336. FIG. FIG. 65A shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 64B and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 slides with the curved wall portion 5336a1 of the lock member 5336. FIG. 65 (b) shows a state in which the drive gear 335b is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 65 (a) and the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2 of the lock member 5336. Is done.

  In addition, when the eccentric cam member 5333 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 65B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is pushed up, and the upper side surface of the lock member 5336 comes into contact with the lower side surface of the lever member 4340. As a result, the swing of the lever member 4340 is restricted.

  In the present embodiment, the lever member 4340 is moved up and down by alternately repeating the state shown in FIG. 64B and the state shown in FIG. 65A (the drive gear 335b is alternately switched and rotated). The swinging operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) disposed at the distal end portion of the lever member 4340 can be swung back and forth (swinging).

  In this case, as shown in FIGS. 64B and 65A, the unlocking cam member 5339 does not come into contact with the locking member 5336 (the unlocking portion 5339c of the unlocking cam member is separated from the locking member 5336). Therefore, it is possible to prevent resistance from being applied to the lock release cam member 5339 from the lock member 5336, and to stabilize the rotation state of the eccentric cam member 5333.

  As illustrated in FIG. 65B, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 pushes up the protruding portion 5336 a 2 of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 rotates in a direction away from the lever member 4340. When the eccentric cam member 6333 is further rotated, the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 moves above the upper end portion of the lock member 5336, so that the lock member 5336 is restored by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). Thus, the movement of the lever member 4340 can be restricted on the upper surface of the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 63A).

  In addition, the load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the lock member 5336 during a short period in which the rear end portion of the lever member 4340 is in contact with the protruding portion 5336a2, and thus the reaction force of the torsion spring SP41 (see FIG. 45). The locking member 5336 can enter the lower part of the lever member 4340 (see FIG. 61B), and a large speed can be secured. Therefore, the movement of the lever member 4340 by the lock member 5336 can be reliably regulated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 65A, a case is considered where a load is applied in a direction in which the player lifts the lever member 4340 upward. In this case, a downward load is applied from the lever member 4340 to the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333, and the eccentric cam member 6333 is rotated clockwise. In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are operated synchronously, when the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is restricted, the rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333 is also restricted, and the lever member 4340 The eccentric cam member 6333 may be damaged by the applied load.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the lever member 4340 is lifted from the state of FIG. 65A and the rear end is lowered, the unlocking cam is accompanied by the clockwise rotation of the eccentric cam member 6333. Since the member 5339 rotates clockwise, the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 moves in a direction away from the lock member 5336. Therefore, there is no possibility that the lock release cam member 5339 contacts the lock member 5336 and the rotation is restricted, so that the eccentric cam member 6333 can be prevented from being damaged by a load applied from the lever member 4340.

  In the present embodiment, the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 are different in the thickness direction (FIG. 65 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface) (FIG. 65 (a)). (Position where there is no interference in the direction parallel to the paper surface). Therefore, even if the cam portion 5333c of the eccentric cam member 6333 and the release portion 5339c of the lock release cam member 5339 rotate in the approaching direction in FIG. 65 (a) from the state of FIG. Since they pass each other, damage to the eccentric cam member 6333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 can be prevented.

  Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the gear damper 338 constantly applies resistance to the lever member 340 has been described. However, the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is limited to when the peeling member 7350 is peeled off from the lever member 7340. A case where resistance is applied from the gear damper 7347 to the lever member 7340 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  66 (a) and 66 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 66A shows a state in which the peeling member 7350 is attracted to the lever member 7340. In FIG. 66B, the swing of the peeling member 7350 is restricted by the lock member 336, and the lever member 7340 is peeled off. A state in which the member 7350 is peeled off is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66A, the lever member 7340 includes a gear damper 7347 disposed inside the main body member 341. The gear damper 7347 is meshed with a gear portion 7351 a formed in a gear tooth shape along a circle centering on an insertion hole 352 formed in the main body member 7351 of the peeling member 7350.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 66 (a), when the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are fixed by suction and swing as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a does not change. The member 7340 does not receive the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66B, in the state where the peeling member 7350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 336 and pulled off from the lever member 7340, the lever member 7340 swings (the player is necked). When the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) is operated), the relative positional relationship between the gear damper 7347 and the gear portion 7351a changes, so that the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is given to the lever member 7340.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper 7347 is applied to the lever member 7340 only when the player gives an overload to the swing operation member 310 (see FIG. 54) to the extent that the lever member 7340 is peeled off from the peeling member 7350. can do. Thereby, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the swing operation member 310 and prompt the player to use the swing operation member 310 appropriately.

  For example, the operation resistance when operating the swing operation member 310 in the state of FIG. 66 (b) becomes excessively large, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. If the lever member 7340 and the peeling member 7350 are returned to the state of being adsorbed and fixed, the operation resistance becomes small and the player can easily operate. Therefore, a player who tries to avoid stress avoids overloading the swing operation member 310. Thereby, it can suppress that the operation device 7300 is destroyed.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lock members 336, 2336, 4336, and 5336 are pivotally supported by the inner case members 330, 3330, 4330, and 5330 has been described. However, the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment includes the lock member 8336. However, the inner case member 8330 is configured to be slidable as the lever member 340 swings. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 8300 according to the present embodiment, and is used instead. The same applies to FIGS. 68 and 69. 67A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position, and FIG. 67B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the inner case member 8330 includes a plurality of long hole-shaped slide holes 8331i formed in the left cover member 8331 along an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. The slide hole 8331i is formed in the same position as the left cover member 8331 at a position corresponding to a left cover member 8331 and a right cover member (not shown) disposed as a pair.

  The slide hole 8331i is composed of a pair of long holes, the inner surface is formed of a smooth surface, the first slide hole 8331i1 disposed on the side away from the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inner surface of the surface is smooth. And a second slide hole 8331i2 disposed mainly on the lever support shaft 331d1 side of the first slide hole 8331i1.

  The second slide hole 8331i2 is a long hole into which the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 of the shaft portion 8336f of the lock member 8336 is inserted. The frictional resistance between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2 changes depending on the posture of the lock member 8336.

  The lock member 8336 is pivotally supported by a plate-like slide plate 8370 that is disposed in a manner that slides along the inner surface of the left cover member 8331. The lock member 8336 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 336b and includes a shaft portion 8336f that passes through the slide plate 8370, and is supported by the slide plate 8370 through the shaft portion 8336f.

  The shaft portion 8336f includes a wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 that is a part of the axial direction and is inserted through the second slide hole 8331i2. The wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 has a pair of first side surfaces 8336f1a formed in a mode (see FIG. 67 (a)) that is separated from the side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 by a predetermined distance. In the state of being opposed to each other, it mainly includes a side surface extending in the longitudinal direction of the second slide hole 8331i2 and a pair of second side surfaces 8336f1b (see FIG. 68 (a)), each side surface being slightly It is configured in a curved substantially rhombus shape.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the first side surface 8336f1a is formed in a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is positioned on the release side. The Further, as shown in FIG. 68A, the second side surface 8336f1b has a curved surface shape (having the same radius of curvature) along the curved shape of the second slide hole 8331i2 in a state where the lock member 8336 is located on the fixed side. It is formed.

  In a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release position side, the first side surface 8336f1a does not contact the second slide hole 8331i2, and a predetermined distance gap is formed, so that the lever member 340 moves following the swing of the lever member 340. It is possible to suppress the movement resistance of the sliding plate 8370.

  FIG. 67B shows a state where the lock member 8336 is rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position. Even in this state, a slight gap is left between the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 and the second slide hole 8331i2. That is, even if the lock member 8336 is slightly rotated from the release side position, the movement resistance of the slide plate 8370 does not increase. Therefore, the swing resistance of the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the player swings the operation device 8300. It can suppress impairing the operational feeling at the time of dynamic operation.

  On the other hand, if the lock member 8336 is kept rotated from the release side position toward the fixed side position by a predetermined amount, the period until the lock member 8336 is arranged on the fixed side at a predetermined timing is shortened. can do. Accordingly, the lock member 8336 can be easily placed on the fixed side at a desired position.

  The slide plate 8370 includes a projecting portion 8371 that is inserted into the slide hole 8331i and projecting in an arc shape in cross section, a magnet portion 8372 that is disposed to face the peeling member 350 and is formed of a magnetic material, and a lock member 8336. A drive motor 8373 disposed on the slide plate 8370 in a manner in which the rotation shaft and the drive shaft are parallel, and a drive gear 8374 that rotates the drive motor 8373 and meshes with the gear portion 336d of the lock member 8336. Prepare mainly.

  The protruding portion 8371 is formed in an arc shape centered on the lever support shaft 331d1. Thereby, it can suppress that the convex part 8371 is caught in the latching recessed part 8331i2.

  The magnet portion 8372 is formed of a magnetic material and is bonded to the peeling member 350. As the lever member 340 is swung in a state where the magnet member 8372 is bonded to the peeling member 350, the slide plate 8370 slides along the slide hole 8331i.

  The drive motor 8373 drives the drive gear 8374 so that the lock member 8336 can be arranged at the release side position (see FIG. 67A) and the fixed side position (see FIG. 68A). Drive means. Since the drive motor 8373 is disposed on the slide plate 8370, the drive motor 8373 slides together with the slide plate 8370.

  The peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects magnetism along the lower side surface. The magnet sensor 8372 is attracted to the peeling member 350 by the magnetic sensor MC1, or the peeling member 350 is separated from the magnet portion 8372. It is possible to detect whether or not Hereinafter, an example of control of the lock member 8336 will be described.

  Here, in the state of FIG. 67 (a), the detection piece 343b (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 16) is disposed in the gap of the second sensor member 325a2 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever It is detected that the member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. In the state of FIG. 67 (b), the detection piece 343b is disposed in the gap of the first sensor member 325a1 (see FIG. 23 (b)), so that the lever member 340 is disposed at the end of the swing range. Is detected.

  Therefore, when the lever member 340 is repeatedly switched between the state shown in FIG. 67 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 67 (b) when the eccentric cam member 333 is stopped, the player moves the swing operation member 310. It can be detected that the operation is repeated up and down within the maximum movable range (signals are output from the sensor members 325a1 and 325a2 to the main controller). In this case, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged by the lever member 340 (peeling member 350) repeatedly colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

  In the aspect in which the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, the lever member 340 in a stopped state can be fixed by the lock member 336, but the lever member in the middle of swinging It was difficult to fix 340 with the lock member 336.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lock member 8336 can move following the lever member 340, so that the rocking of the lever member 340 is stopped by the lock member 8336 even during the rocking operation of the lever member 340. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, when it is detected that the player repeatedly operates the swing operation member 310 up and down within the maximum movable range, the lock member 8336 is activated to prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged. Can do. This will be described below.

  68 (a) and 68 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 68 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed between the upward position and the downward position, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 68 (a). The load is applied downward to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, by rotating the drive gear 8374 and disposing the lock member 8336 on the fixed side, the second side surface 8336f1b of the wedge-shaped portion 8336f1 is brought into contact with both side surfaces of the second slide hole 7332i2. Thus, the sliding movement of the slide plate 8370 is stopped by the frictional force. In this state, the lock member 8336 locks the peeling member 350 downward with respect to the operation of pushing down the swing operation member 310, and the operation of pushing up the swing operation member 310 through the magnet portion 8372. The slide plate 8370 locks the peeling member 350 upward. Therefore, the lever member 340 maintains its posture in the state shown in FIG. 68A even if a slight load is applied in the vertical direction.

  In the state of FIG. 68 (a), when a player applies a load of a predetermined amount or more (more than the adsorption force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340) to the swing operation member 310, The peeling member 350 is peeled off from the lever member 340 (see FIG. 68B). Thereby, a load of a predetermined amount or more given to the swing operation member 310 by the player is transmitted to the lock member 8336, so that the lock member 8336 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (b), the slide plate 8370 is fixed in the middle of its movement range (in the middle of the movement range of the lever member 340), so that the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Even so, it is possible to prevent the lever member 340 from contacting the eccentric cam member 333 by contacting the magnet portion 8372 before the lever member 340 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. This can prevent the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the angle range in which the lever member 340 can be swung (range above the peeling member 350) is narrowed, so the player moves the swing operation member 310 upward. By doing so, the momentum applied to the lever member 340 can be suppressed, and the load generated when the lever member 340 contacts the peeling member 350 from above can be suppressed.

  Thereby, since the load generated in the lock member 8336 due to the reaction when the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the peeling member 350 can be suppressed, the driving force of the drive motor 8373 that drives the lock member 8336 can be suppressed. it can.

  69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 8300 along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 69 (a), the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 that are swung by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 are illustrated in phantom lines, and the peeling member is disposed in a state where the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release side. The lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 in a state where 350 is pulled off from the magnet portion 8372 are illustrated by solid lines, and in FIG. 69B, the lock member 8336 is moved from the state illustrated by solid lines in FIG. A state of being arranged on the fixed side is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, when the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 swing due to the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, the slide plate 8370 also slides together with the peeling member 350. At this time, if a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 downward at a high speed, the slide plate 8370 cannot follow the moving speed of the peeling member 350 (decelerated by the frictional resistance with the slide hole 8331i), and the peeling is caused. The member 350 and the slide plate 8370 can be separated (see the solid line portion in FIG. 69 (a)).

  In this case, when the lock member 8336 is disposed on the release side, the slide plate 8370 is not fixed, and the player performs an operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward, the eccentric member 333 contacts the eccentric cam member 333. By contacting, the eccentric cam member 333 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peeling member 350 includes a magnetic sensor MC1 that detects that the magnet portion 8372 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the peeling member 350 and the magnet portion 8372 are separated, immediately, the lock member 8336 is controlled to be disposed on the fixed side (see FIG. 69 (b)), thereby peeling. The upper surface of the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the member 350.

  As a result, even if the player applies an upward load to the swing operation member 310, the peeling member 350 comes into contact with the lock member 8336 before the peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Since the movement is stopped, the eccentric cam member 333 can be prevented from being damaged. This effect is an effect that is exhibited only when there is a configuration in which the lock member 8336 slides together with the peeling member 350 as in the present embodiment.

  That is, when the lock member 336 is pivotally supported by the inner case member 330 as in the first embodiment, depending on the phase of the eccentric cam member 333 (see, for example, FIG. 24B), the lock member 336 is fixed to the fixed side. The upper surface of the eccentric cam member 333 may protrude toward the peeling member 350 than the upper surface of the lock member 336. If an upward load is applied to the swing operation member 310 in this state, The peeling member 350 comes into contact with the eccentric cam member 333. Therefore, the effect of preventing the eccentric cam member 333 from being damaged is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, the peeling member 350 and the lock member 8336 move in the same manner by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333 (the peeling member 350 is in contact with both the eccentric cam member 333 and the magnet portion 8372). Therefore, immediately after the peeling member 350 is peeled off from the magnet portion 8372, the lock member 8336 is disposed on the fixed side, so that the upper surface of the lock member 8336 is made to be closer to the peeling member 350 than the eccentric cam member 333. You can get closer. Accordingly, the lock member 8336 can be brought into contact with the peeling member 350 before the eccentric cam member 333, and the peeling member 350 can be prevented from colliding with the eccentric cam member 333.

  When the magnetic sensor MC1 detects that the magnet portion 8372 and the peeling member 350 are separated, it is preferable to stop the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333. If the eccentric cam member 333 continues to rotate and moves so that the maximum diameter portion approaches the peeling member 350, the maximum diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 333 may exceed the lock member 8336 and approach the peeling member 350. Because.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lever members 340, 2340, 3340, and 4340 are all rigid has been described. However, the operation device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment uses a coil spring as a swing operation member 310 of the lever member 9340. The elastic connection members CS91 and CS92 are provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 70A and 70B are side views of the operation device 9300 in the ninth embodiment. 70A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the downward position, and FIG. 70B illustrates the swing operation member 310 downward in the state illustrated in FIG. 70A. A state where a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied and the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are bent is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the lever member 9340 includes coil spring-like elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 disposed in the vicinity of the swing operation member 310 in a pair.

  In a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 310, the state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are contracted to substantially the same length is maintained. In order to maintain the state of FIG. 70A (the state in which both are contracted to substantially the same length) while supporting the weight of the swing operation member 310, the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is lowered. The elastic coupling member CS91 is set higher than the elastic coefficient of the side elastic coupling member CS91, and the lengths of both are substantially the same.

  When the load applied by the player to the swing operation member 310 is smaller than a predetermined amount, the relative positional relationship between the lever member 9340 and the swing operation member 310 is maintained by the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied downward to the swing operation member 310, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 change in expansion / contraction state (upper elastic coupling member). The relative positional relationship between the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 9340 is broken and the load is applied to the swing operation member 310 because the length of the CS 91 is longer than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. It is possible to suppress the load from being directly transmitted to the rear part of the lever member 340 (the peeling member 350 and the like, see FIG. 16). In other words, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 can be consumed for the deformation of the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92. Therefore, it is possible to suppress damage to members inside the outer case member 320 (for example, the eccentric cam member 333, see FIG. 10) due to the load applied to the swing operation member 310.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the eccentric cam members 333, 2333, 4333, and 5333 are disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and below the lever members 340, 2340, and 4340 has been described. In the operation device 10300, the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 and above the lever member 340. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  71 (a), 71 (b), 72 (a), and 72 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 in the tenth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 10300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. 73 and 74 are similarly substituted.

  71A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position. In FIG. 71B, the eccentric cam member 2333 is changed from the state in FIG. 71A to FIG. ) Shows a state rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle θ101. In FIG. 72 (a), the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated counterclockwise from the angle θ101 in FIG. 71 (a). FIG. 72 (b) shows a state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a), the operation device 10300 includes a box-shaped inner case member 10330 having a rectangular cross section, and the inner case member 10330 supports the eccentric cam member 2333 behind the lever support shaft 331d1. A drive gear 10335 that is provided with an eccentric cam shaft 10331i and is rotationally driven by a drive motor is disposed at a position away from the eccentric cam shaft 10331i by a predetermined distance, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotationally driven by the rotation of the drive gear 10335. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the torsion spring SP101 formed of an elastic material generates a biasing force that biases the lever member 340 in a direction to push the swing operation member 310 downward.

  As a result, the lever member 340 is constantly biased in such a manner that the lever member 340 is pressed against the eccentric cam member 2333, so that the lever member 340 can be operated following the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  In this embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 described in the second embodiment is used as a means for swinging the lever member 340, the player pushes down the swing operation member 310, so that the rear end of the lever member 340 Even if the portion is lifted and a load is generated from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333, the cam member 2333b can be prevented from being damaged by sliding between the main body member 2333a and the cam member 2333b.

  Here, even if the cam member 2333b can slide with respect to the main body member 2333a, when the extending direction of the rib portion 2333b4 of the cam member 2333b and the upper surface of the lever member 340 come into contact with each other in a vertical posture, the lever member 340 From the other end acts in the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 2333 (does not escape in the circumferential direction), and the cam member 2333b may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the portion P101 that contacts the upper surface of the lever member 340 in the state in which the swing operation member 310 is disposed in the upward position is the eccentric cam member 2333. The rib portion 2333b4 is shifted by a predetermined angle (a position shifted by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 71).

  Accordingly, even when a load is applied from the lever member 340 to the eccentric cam member 2333 in the state of FIG. 71A, a load is applied in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 2333, and the cam member 2333b is moved to the main body member 2333a. Can be slid. Therefore, the eccentric cam member 2333 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, since the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed on the rear upper side of the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 340 is separated from the eccentric cam member 333 when the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310. Move in the direction you want. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged by performing an erroneous operation of lifting the lever member 340.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), a cylindrical member is disposed below the peeling member 350, and the lever member 340 can no longer be swung (the posture shown in FIG. End position).

  When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 71B to the state shown in FIG. 72A, the swing operation member 310 swings upward. When the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 72A to the state shown in FIG. 71B, the swing operation member 310 swings downward. In this way, by repeatedly rotating the eccentric cam member 2333 clockwise and rotating it counterclockwise, the swing operation member 310 can be reciprocally swung up and down (swinging). Thereby, a state advantageous to a player and a disadvantageous state can be notified. In addition, the player can visually recognize the operation device 10300 as an effect device.

  In the case where the swing operation member is reciprocally swung up and down by the reciprocating rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333, it is preferable that the eccentric cam member 2333 is disposed behind the lever support shaft 331d1 as in the present embodiment. The lever support shaft 331d1 can be easily arranged on the player side (front side), so that the swing angle of the swing operation member 310 can be improved even when the circumferential lengths of the lever support shafts 331d1 of the notches 331c1 and 332c1 are the same. It is because it can enlarge. In this case, the amount of movement of the swing operation member 310 in the vertical direction can be kept large, and the effect of the swing operation member 310 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72B, the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side, and the movement of the peeling member 350 is restricted by the lock member 336. Therefore, the lever member 340 and the peeling member 350 are prevented from swinging when a small load, such as a player placing his / her hand on the swing operation member 310, is applied.

  73 (a), 73 (b), and 74 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 10300 taken along line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). In FIG. 73 (a), the swing operation member 310 is disposed at the upward position, the lock member 336 is disposed at the fixed side, and the eccentric cam member 2333 is retracted to the opposite side of the lever member 340. 73 (b) shows a state where the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350 from the state of FIG. 73 (a) and is in contact with the eccentric cam member 2333. In FIG. From the state of FIG. 73 (b), the state where the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle and the lever member 340 is swung clockwise is shown, and the state of FIG. 73 (b) is an imaginary line. Is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock member 336 is disposed on the fixed side and the movement of the lever member 340 is restricted, the eccentric cam member 2333 is controlled to move to a position away from the lever member 340 accordingly. . As a result, when a load is applied to the swing operation member 310 and the lever member 340 is pulled away from the peeling member 350 and moved, the lever member 340 comes into contact with the cylindrical portion 2333b1 side of the eccentric cam member 2333 (FIG. 73). (See (b)), it is possible to prevent the cam portion 2333b2 of the eccentric cam member 2333 from being damaged.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the lever member 340 is brought into contact with the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is pulled off from the peeling member 350, the load applied to the swing operation member 310 by the player is reduced. A part is used to peel the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350. Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 2333 by the lever member 340 can be reduced.

  When the player applies a load in the push-down direction to the swing operation member 310, the lever member 340 does not move until the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, so a reaction force is transmitted to the player ( The swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 is increased). Thus, in order to push down the swing operation member 310, the player loads a load on the swing operation member 310 that is a predetermined amount or more (more than the attractive force between the magnet member 354 of the peeling member 350 and the lever member 340). Since it is necessary (because it becomes heavy), it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation.

  As shown in FIG. 74, according to the present embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 is rotated to swing the lever member 340 and to swing the head. The member 310 can be reciprocated up and down (turning operation).

  Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the change in the internal state in which the lever member 340 has been peeled off from the peeling member 350. Therefore, it is possible to suppress anxiety that the player feels when performing the destructive operation of peeling the lever member 340 from the peeling member 350.

  Further, by swinging the lever member 340 after the swing operation member 310 is pushed down, the reaction force can be returned to the player's hand holding the swing operation member 310, and the player feels the operation feeling. Can be granted.

  On the other hand, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the eccentric cam member 2333 rotates at a high speed, so that the lever member 340 reciprocally swings at a high speed. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the abnormality. For example, the character “weak” can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko machine 10 to notify the player that the load applied to the swing operation member 310 is too strong.

  That is, in this embodiment, after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the lever member 340 is reciprocated up and down in accordance with the rotation of the eccentric cam member 2333. It can be used to give a feeling of return operation, and can also be used to notify the player of an abnormality. In the former case, there is an effect of promoting the operation performed by the player, and in the latter case, there is an effect of suppressing the operation performed by the player. This state can be switched depending on the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 2333.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 2333 after the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the player can promote the predetermined operation or perform the predetermined operation. It can be suppressed.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each of the above embodiments, the case where the pushing operation of the lens member 317 and the swing operation of the swing operation member 310 are not structurally related has been described. However, the operation device 11300 in the eleventh embodiment includes the swing operation member 11310. When the lens member 317 is pushed, the resistance at the time of swinging increases. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  75 (a) and 75 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 11310 and the lever member 340 in the eleventh embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 11300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. 75A shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pushing load. In FIG. 75B, the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 75A. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the swing operation member 11310, a through hole is formed on the central axis of the pressing member 11366b of the vibration device 11366, and the radial direction of the shaft support rod 363 extends from the bottom wall of the bobbin member 11366a. A pair of through holes are formed to open toward both sides. Therefore, a through hole that passes through the vibration device 11366 and penetrates from the vibration member 11314 to the shaft support rod 363 is formed. In addition, the space | interval of the opening of the bobbin member 11366a is made shorter than the outer diameter of the torsion spring SP2 wound around the shaft support bar 363.

  The vibration member 11314 includes a rotation stop portion 11314g inserted through the through hole of the pressing member 11366b.

  The rotation stop portion 11314g is a rod-like portion that is inserted into the through hole of the pressing member 11366b, and includes a sandwiching portion 11314g1 that is inserted into the pair of through holes of the bobbin member 11366a and is formed into a pair of leaf springs. .

  The sandwiching portion 11314g1 is arranged at a position separated from the torsion spring SP2 in the no-load state (see FIG. 75A), and in the state where the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 75B), the torsion spring. It is arranged at a position to sandwich SP2. Here, the sandwiching portion 11314g1 is formed in a leaf spring shape, and the sandwiching portion 11314g1 holds the shaft support bar 363 together with the torsion spring SP2 in the state of FIG. 75B, so the shaft support bar 363 of the swing operation member 310 is held. It is possible to increase the resistance of the swinging motion centering on. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 11366, the vibration of the vibration device 11366 is consumed as a driving force for swinging around the pivot rod 363 of the swing operation portion, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player (see FIG. It can suppress that the vibration component of 75 (a) up-down direction) reduces.

  In addition, the vibration component of the vibration device 11366 transmitted to the player is ensured while the swinging operation member 310 is restrained from swinging only when the player pushes the lens member 317, and the player removes the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the swing operation member 310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibration device 11366.

  Thus, the same vibration device 11366 has the effect of securing the vibration component transmitted to the player who pushes the lens member 317 and the effect of intensely swinging the swing operation member 11310 in the no-load state and attracting the player's attention. Both can be achieved.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the resistance of the swing operation of the swing operation member 11310 is increased by the pushing operation of the lens member 317 has been described. However, the operation device 12300 in the twelfth embodiment pushes the lens member 317. As a result, the regulating rod 365 is pressed against the lower end of the angle regulating hole 361d of the swinging member 360. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 76A and 76B are partial cross-sectional views of the swing operation member 12310 and the lever member 340 in the twelfth embodiment along the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 17A illustrates the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, but the appearance is the same as that of the operation device 12300 according to the present embodiment, which is used instead. FIG. 76A shows a no-load state in which the lens member 317 is not subjected to a pressing load. In FIG. 76B, the lens member 317 is pushed in from the state of FIG. 76A. The state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 76A, the swing operation member 12310 mainly includes an intermediate frame member 12312 and a vibration member 12314.

  The intermediate frame member 12312 has a larger opening at the center of the bottom 312a than the intermediate frame member 312 (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment.

  The vibration member 12314 includes a bar-shaped pressing rod portion 12314g that extends downward from the main body portion 314a at the center opening of the intermediate frame member 12312 along the vibration device 366. The pressing rod portion 12314g extends to a position where the tip can abut against the regulating rod 365.

  The pressing rod portion 12314g is disposed at a position in contact with the regulation rod 365 in the no-load state (see FIG. 76A), and in the state in which the lens member 317 is pushed in (see FIG. 76B), the regulation rod. It is pressed against 365. Therefore, by pushing the lens member 317, the swing operation member 12310 is rotated clockwise by the distance that the pressing rod portion 12314g moves (the distance between the main body portion 314a and the pressing member 366b), and the shaft support rod 365 is pressed against the end of the angle regulating hole 361d. In this state, since the shaft support bar 365 can be fixed to the angle restricting hole 361d, the swinging motion of the swing operation member 12310 around the shaft support bar 363 can be suppressed. That is, by performing the operation of pushing the lens member 317, the swing resistance of the swing operation member 12310 with respect to the lever member 340 can be increased.

  In this case, during the operation of the vibration device 366, the vibration of the vibration device 366 is consumed as a driving force for swinging around the shaft support rod 363 of the swing operation portion, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player (see FIG. It is possible to suppress the reduction of the vibration component (76 (a) in the vertical direction).

  Further, the vibration component of the vibration device 366 transmitted to the player is ensured while suppressing the swing of the swing operation member 12310 only when the player pushes the lens member 317, and the player removes the lens member 317 from the lens member 317. In a no-load state in which the hand is released, the swing operation member 12310 can be swung by the vibration of the vibration device 366.

  As a result, the same vibration device 366 has the effect of ensuring the vibration component transmitted to the player pushing the lens member 317 and the effect of making the swinging operation member 12310 violently move and attract the player's attention in the no-load state. Both can be achieved.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 90. In the first embodiment described above, the lever member 340 is rotated by the rotation of the eccentric cam member 333, and the swing operation member 310 is held against the lever member 340 in the biasing direction with respect to the lever member 340 during the rotation operation. In the operation device 13300 according to the thirteenth embodiment, while the lever member 340 rotates, the swinging operation member 310 is opposite to the lever member 340 in the urging direction with respect to the lever member 340. The displacement state can be configured. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 77 illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 of the operation device 13300 is disposed at the downward position (see FIG. 7). As shown in FIG. 77, the operation device 13300 is arranged such that a swing operation member 13310 projects from the rectangular outer case member 13320 to the front side.

  78 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 13300. FIG. 78 shows a state in which the outer case member 13320 is removed from the inner case member 13330 disposed on the inner side of the outer case member 13320.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the outer case member 13320 is formed in a shape along the curved surface of the cover members 344 and 345 (see FIG. 11), and the back side is formed, and the inner case member 13330 has left and right sides of the cover members 344 and 345 from the front side. It mainly includes a left front cover 13321 and a right front cover 13322 that are attached in a manner of hiding the edges, and a left cover member 13323 and a right cover member 13324 that are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 13330 from the left and right directions.

  The left cover member 13323 and the right cover member 13324 are respectively provided with adjustment long holes 13323a and 13324a that are formed in the front upper and lower ends and are elongated in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction.

  The adjustment long holes 13323a and 13324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322, respectively, and are elongated in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 have a long shape due to molding variation. Even when the shapes vary, the left and right positions of the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 relative to the swing operation member 13310 can be easily adjusted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the horizontal displacement between the wall member 13322b fitted into the right front cover 13322 and the contact member 13312a.

  The left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322 are fastened and fixed to the adjustment elongated holes 13323a and 13324a in the front-rear direction, and are fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at end faces facing in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the right front cover 13322 has a fitting recess 13322a that is recessed rightward from an end surface of the right front cover 13322 that comes into contact with the left front cover 13321, and the fitting recess 13322a is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction. Wall member 13322b to be mounted in a manner, and in a state where the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 are assembled (see FIG. 77), the leftward movement is stopped by the end face of the left front cover 13321. The member 13322b is held inside the fitting recess 13322a.

  With this configuration, when replacing the wall member 13322b, the wall member 13322b can be replaced simply by removing the right front cover 13322 (the wall member 13322b is damaged by receiving a load from the posture correcting device 13312). It is an easy place). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

  FIG. 79 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 13300. FIG. 79, the outer case member 13320 is not shown, and the inner case member 13330 is disassembled.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d, and the plurality of rod-shaped members 13331d pivotally supports a lever support shaft 331d1 that pivotally supports the lever member 13340 and an eccentric cam member 5333. The eccentric cam shaft 331d2, the lock shaft 4331d3 on which the lock member 5336 is supported, and a length shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1 disposed above the lock shaft 4331d3 and the lock release cam member 5339 are supported. And the unlocking shaft 13331d5 to be provided.

  A bent sheet metal member B13 is fixed to the front end of the unlocking shaft 13331d5 by being fastened and fixed to the left cover member 13331. Thereby, the unlocking cam member 5339 is maintained so as not to be extracted from the unlocking shaft 13331d5.

  By forming the lock release shaft 13331d5 shorter than the lever support shaft 331d1, the lever member 13340 is provided in a portion where the lock release shaft 13331d5 is not disposed (a portion on the right side in front of the tip of the lock release shaft 13331d5). Can be prevented from interfering with the unlocking shaft 13331d5 and the lever member 13340.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the inner case member 13330 includes a left cover member 13331 and a right cover member 13332 that are assembled in a box shape in which the lever member 13340 is disposed on the inner side, an eccentric cam member 5333, and a phase detection member 334. The first drive device 335, a lock member 5336, a gear damper 338, and a lock release cam member 5339 are mainly provided.

  FIG. 80 is an exploded front perspective view of the swing operation member 13310 and the lever member 13340. FIG. 80 illustrates a state where the rear side frame member 13311 is disassembled from the swing operation member 13310, and a state where the gear damper receiving member 342 and the posture detection member 343 that are fastened and fixed to the left and right of the lever member 13340 are disassembled. Is illustrated.

  The back side frame member 13311 is formed in a hemispherical shape with the outer shell protruding to the back side, and is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in such a manner that the upper part projects (returns) from the protruding tip to the front side (FIG. 17B). )reference). The recessed portion is provided with an insertion hole 311a which is a substantially rectangular opening. The insertion hole 311a is a through hole through which the swinging member 360 is partially inserted.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the lever member 13340 is formed of a metal material such as iron and is formed into a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a gear damper receiving member 342, and coaxial with the gear damper receiving member 342. A posture detecting member 343 that is pivotally supported, an upper cover member 344, a lower cover member 345, an angle regulating rod member 346, and a swinging member 360 disposed at the front end of the main body member 341. Prepare mainly.

  81 is a front exploded perspective view of the main body member 13341, the upper cover member 344, the lower cover member 345, and the swinging member 360 of the lever member 13340. FIG.

  A main body member 13341 of the lever member 13340 includes a main body portion 13341a formed in a long bar shape having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of shaft holes 341b drilled in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion of the main body portion 13341a, and a restriction. A hole 341c, a pair of swinging member support portions 341d, a shaft hole 341e, a restriction hole 341f, and an eccentric cam member 5333 and a lock member 5336 (see FIG. 79) that are fastened and fixed to the rear lower portion of the main body portion 13341a. A contact member 13341g to be contacted.

  The contact member 13341g is in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 at the front side portion of the lower side surface, and is in contact with the lock member 5336 at the back side portion of the lower side surface. The cross-sectional shape of the contact member 13341g is the same as that of the lock receiving member 4350 (see FIG. 46).

  Next, the frame structure of the swing operation member 13310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a front exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 13310. The swing operation member 13310 includes a disk-shaped intermediate base M13 fastened and fixed to a fixed plate portion 361e (see FIG. 81) of the swing member 360, and a back side frame member fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the intermediate base M13. 13311, a posture correcting device 13312 that is disposed inside the back side frame member 13311 and has a portion that protrudes from the inside to the outside, and a flange portion that is sandwiched between the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 A front cover 13313 and a back cover 13314 that are fastened to each other with the back side frame member 13311 and the intermediate base M13 sandwiched in the front-rear direction, and a pair of covers that are covered at the fastening positions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. The separation prevention cover 13315 is fitted from below the separation prevention cover 13315 (FIG. 82). That the protective cover 13316, a lens member 13317 which is elastically connected with the intermediate base M13, mainly comprises a.

  The posture correcting device 13312 includes a contact member 13312a projecting outward from the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311 and a support member 13312b disposed between the contact member 13312a via the coil spring SP13. And a flange member 13312c that protrudes inward from the flange insertion hole 13311e of the rear frame member 13311 and has a flange-shaped portion that fits with the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b.

  The contact member 13312a includes a straight bar-shaped protruding portion 13312a1 and a flange portion 13312a2 protruding from the protruding portion 13312a1 in the left-right direction in a flange shape.

  The projecting portion 13312a1 is a portion projecting outside the guide hole 13311b of the back side frame member 13311, and the flange portion 13312a2 is in contact with the extended wall 13311c of the back side frame member 13311 so that the contact member 13312 is more than that. This is the part that prevents it from overhanging.

  The front cover 13313 is provided with a recessed locking portion 13313a having a recessed shape that is opened rearward below the fastening position with the back cover 13314 (backward in FIG. 82).

  The separation prevention cover 13315 is recessed with a shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protective cover 13316 and is configured to receive the protective cover 13316 in the assembled state, and above the receiving recess 13315a (front side in FIG. 82). A rod that is drilled and inserted through the inside mainly includes a retaining hole 13315b configured to be fitted in the locking recess 13313a in the assembled state (see FIG. 77).

  FIG. 83 illustrates a method of assembling the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation prevention cover 13315, and the protective cover 13316 in time series. FIG. 83A is a bottom view of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. 83 (b) is a bottom view of the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the separation prevention cover 13315, and FIG. 83 (c) is a front cover 13313 along the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc in FIG. 83 (b). 4 is a cross-sectional view of a cover 13314, a separation prevention cover 13315, and a protective cover 13316. FIG.

  83A, the state in which the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are fixed is illustrated in FIG. 83A, and in FIG. 83B, the separation prevention cover 13315 is in the state of FIG. 83A. 83 (c) shows a state in which the protective cover 13316 is added to the state shown in FIG. 83 (b) and the state is fixed to the rear side frame member 13311.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314 are assembled by fastening and fixing wall portions opposed to each other with fastening screws N13a. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the fastening screw 13315 is attached in such a manner as to cover the fastening screw N13a (at least in the front-rear direction (covered in the up-down direction in FIG. 83 (b)) and is inserted through the locking recess 13313a. N13b is screwed into the retaining hole 13315b, so that the separation preventing cover 13315 is fixed in a non-removable manner.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the protective cover 13316 is fitted into the receiving recess 13315a so as to cover the fastening screw N13b (it is fitted in such a manner that it cannot be pulled out to the side (FIG. 83 (c) right)), and thereafter The intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) is fastened and fixed to the back frame member 13311, whereby the upper surface of the back frame member is brought into contact with the lower surface of the protective cover 13316.

  With this structure, it is difficult to separate the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, and the manipulation device 13300 can be partially disassembled to prevent unauthorized use of wires inside.

  That is, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the fastening screw N13a must be removed, and the path to the fastening screw N13a is prevented by the separation prevention cover 13315.

  Further, in order to separate the separation prevention cover 13315 from the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, the fastening screw N13b must be removed. The path to the fastening screw N13b is prevented by the protective cover 13316, and the protective cover 13316 is provided. Is in contact with the rear side frame member 13311 in the pulling direction in the assembled state, it is necessary to remove the rear side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13 (see FIG. 82) in order to remove the protective cover 13316.

  Accordingly, in order to disassemble the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314, it is necessary to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13. However, in the assembled state, the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover are provided on the back side of the back side frame member 13311. Since 13322 is arranged in proximity (see FIG. 77), the access path for removing the fastening screw inserted from the back side toward the front side becomes narrow. Therefore, it can be difficult to remove the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13, and fraud can be prevented.

  Next, the back side frame member 13311 will be described with reference to FIG. 84 (a) is a perspective view of the back side frame member 13311. FIG. 84 (b) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXXIVb in FIG. 84 (a) (viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d). ) Is a top view of the back-side frame member 13311, and FIG. 84C is a cross-sectional view of the back-side frame member 13311 along the line LXXXIVc-LXXXIVc in FIG. 84B.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the back frame member 13311 includes an insertion hole 311a through which the lever member 13340 (see FIG. 80) is inserted, and a front-rear direction (FIG. 84 (c) left-right direction) below the insertion hole 311a. ), A wall-like extended wall 13311c extending outward in the left-right direction from the left and right side surfaces of the guide hole 13311b inside the back frame member 13311, and the bottom wall of the guide hole 13311b A guide bottom wall 13311d extending inward of the back side frame member 13311 along with the flange insertion hole 13311e drilled in the vertical direction at the end of the guide bottom wall 13311d opposite to the guide hole 13311b. A pair of support member guide walls 13311f extending from the end of the extended wall 13311c along the opening direction of the guide hole 13311b; The mainly it includes.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c), the flange insertion hole 13311e is inclined such that the side surface on the guide bottom wall 13311d side becomes farther from the guide hole 1311b as it goes upward from the lower end. By this inclination, it is possible to secure a contact area with an inclined contact portion 13312c3 of a flange member 13312c, which will be described later, and to prevent the guide bottom wall 13311d from being damaged (cracked) by a load applied from the flange member 13312c.

  The support member guide wall 13311f is formed such that the upper end surface (the front side surface in FIG. 84 (a)) is parallel to the guide bottom wall 13311d.

  Next, the flange member 13312c will be described with reference to FIG. The flange member 13312c is a member made of a hard resin material, and FIG. 85 (a) is a front perspective view of the flange member 13312c, and FIG. 85 (b) is the direction of the arrow LXXXVb in FIG. 85 (a). 85 (c) is a front view of the flange member 13312c as viewed, FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the flange member 13312c as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVc in FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (d) is FIG. 85 (b). It is sectional drawing of the collar member 13312c in the LXXXVd-LXXXVd line | wire.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the flange member 13312c is a member configured in a bilaterally symmetric shape, and extends from the upper end of the rectangular plate-shaped main body portion 13312c1 along the vertical direction to the front side. Formed as a flange portion 13312c2 provided, an inclined contact portion 13312c3 extending from the lower end portion of the main body portion 13312c1 to the front side, and a bottom wall projecting outward from the bottom surfaces of the main body portion 13312c1 and the inclined contact portion 13312c3 And a recessed portion 13312c5 that is recessed in such a manner that a part of the main body portion 13312c1 is shaved in the longitudinal direction from the lower surface of the bottom wall portion 13312c4.

  The inclination angle of the bottom wall part 13312c4 of the inclination contact part 13312c3 is the same as the inclination angle of the flange insertion hole 13311e with respect to the guide bottom wall 13311d of the back side frame member 13311.

  Next, the support member 13312b will be described with reference to FIG. The support member 13312b is a member made of a hard resin and formed in a symmetrical shape with respect to the longitudinal direction as viewed from above, and FIG. 86 (a) is a front perspective view of the support member 13312b. FIG. 86B is a top view of the support member 13312b as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXVIb in FIG. 86A, and FIG. 86C is a cross-sectional view of the support member 13312b along the line LXXXVIc-LXXXVIc in FIG. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the support member 13312b includes a body portion 13312b1 formed in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, and a pair of plate-like contact plates 13312b2 that connect both side surfaces of the intersecting portion of the body portion 13312b1. The locking projection 13312b3 projecting in the thickness direction from the end of the main body 13312b1 and the peeping hole 13312b4 drilled in the vertical direction at the intersection of the main body 13312b1 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (c), the support member 13312b is a member in which the coil spring SP13 and the contact member 13312a are disposed in a region surrounded by the main body portion 13312b1 and the contact plate 13312b2.

  When the main body 13312b1 is assembled with the coil spring SP13 being covered, the coil spring SP13 can be visually recognized through the viewing hole 13312b4. For this reason, the coil spring SP13 is forgotten to be inserted or the position of the coil spring SP13 relative to the support member 13312b is shifted. This can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, a method for assembling the posture correcting device 13312 to the back frame member 13311 will be described. 87 and 88, the manner in which the posture correcting device 13312 is assembled to the back side frame member 13311 is illustrated in time series.

  87 (a) is a partial top view of the back-side frame member 13311, and FIG. 87 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back-side frame member 13311 along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 87 (c) is a partial top view of the back-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312. FIG. 87 (d) is a back-side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device along the line LXXXVIId-LXXXVIId in FIG. 87 (c). FIG. 87 (e) is a cross-sectional view of the back frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIe-LXXXVIIe of FIG. 87 (d).

  88 (a), 88 (c), and 88 (e) are partial top views of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312. FIG. 88 (b) is the same as FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 88D is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 in the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb, and FIG. 88D is a rear side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device in the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId of FIG. FIG. 88 (f) is a partial cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 13312 along the line LXXXVIIIf-LXXXVIIIf of FIG. 88 (e).

  A method for assembling the back side frame member 13310 and the posture correcting device 13312 will be described in detail. First, the posture correcting device 13312 is moved along the guide bottom wall 13311d to the rear side frame member 13310 shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), and FIGS. 87 (c) and 87 (d). ), The tip of the main body portion 13312b1 of the support member 13312b is inserted into the guide hole 13311b. Here, the flange member 13312c is assembled to the left of the support member 13312b, but since it is retrofitted, the space of the path for inserting the support member 13312b into the guide hole 13311b (the support member 13312b in FIG. 87 (d)) The space on the left side can be widened, and the support member 13312b can be easily inserted into the guide hole 13311b.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the abutting member 13312a has the rear side frame member 13311 in such a manner that the flange portion 13312a2 is locked (damped) to the extended wall 13311c of the rear side frame member 13311. Is disposed inside.

  In the state shown in FIG. 87 (c) to FIG. 87 (e), the coil spring SP13 is in a state of being contracted from the natural length. That is, a load directed to the right is applied to the support member 13312b, and when the load is released, the support member 13312b moves to the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), from the state shown in FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e), the flange member 13312c is inserted into the flange insertion hole 13311e of the rear frame member 13311 from the rear side. The frame member 13311 is inserted from the outside (lower side of FIG. 88 (b)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), a part of the collar member 13312c is exposed to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311. Therefore, if the assembly is forgotten or the collar member is damaged and dropped, These defects can be noticed by inspection.

  88 (c) and 88 (d), the flange member 13312c is pushed in until the bottom wall portion 1312c4 of the flange member 13312c comes into contact with the lower surface of the guide bottom wall 13311d, and in this state, it is applied to the support member 13312b. When the load that has been removed is removed, the support member 13312b is moved leftward in FIG. 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 until the support member 13312b contacts the flange member 13312c (the leftward movement of the support member 13312b is caused by the flange member 13312c). The locking projection 13312b3 is covered with the flange 13312c2 of the flange member 13312c from above, so that the upward movement of the support member 13312b is restricted.

  That is, the support member 13312b is positioned on the back side frame member 13311 as shown in FIGS. 88 (e) and 88 (f) by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13.

  In the present embodiment, since the flange member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced. That is, in the embodiment in which the flange member 13312c is assembled to the rear frame member 13311 from the inner side of the rear frame member 13311, the flange member 13312c is moved to the rear side in the same manner as the flange portion 13312c2 blocks the upward movement of the support member 13312b. In the case where the hook-like portion that stops moving upward from the frame member 13311 is disposed on the opposite side of the hook portion 13312c2, the support member 13312b is added to the size of the hook portion 13312c2, and the size of the hook-like portion is set. Need to be moved.

  In this case, it is difficult to select the coil spring SP13, and the function of the posture correcting device 13312 may be hindered. That is, when importance is attached to the holding force of the posture correcting device 13312, it is better to select a coil spring SP13 having a large elastic force. If the support member 13312b needs to be moved excessively (for example, needs to be moved twice as much) at the time of assembly, the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 increases (for example, doubles), and the force is weak. Assembling is difficult for the operator.

  On the other hand, the elastic force of the coil spring SP13 that holds the support member 13312b in the assembled state is independent of the distance that the support member 13312b is moved when assembling the collar member 13312c, and is from the natural length of the coil spring SP13 in the assembled state. By displacement. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the distance for moving the support member 13312b with a smaller force and ensure a large holding force. In this embodiment, since the collar member 13312c is assembled from the outside of the back side frame member 13311, the moving dimension of the support member 13312b can be reduced.

  When the posture correcting device 13312 is removed, the front end portion (left end portion in FIG. 88 (f)) of the support member 13312b is moved in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 is contracted, whereby the hook member 13312c and the support member 13312b are engaged. The stop is released, and the flange member 13312c and the support member 13312b can be separately detached from the back frame member 13311.

  In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the front end of the main body portion 13312b1 is disposed on the inner side (surface position) than the outer side surface of the back side frame member 13311. It is difficult to pull out the support member 13312b from the outside, and in order to move the support member 13312b in the direction in which the coil spring SP13 contracts, it is necessary to apply a force from the inside of the back side frame member 13311. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly removing the support member 13312b from the back side frame member 13311 and unauthorized removal of the support member 13312b and the saddle member 13312c.

  In order to prevent the wobbling of the support member 13312b, in the assembled state (see FIG. 88 (f)), the lower surface of the flange portion 13312c2 of the flange member 13312c and the upper surface of the locking projection 13312b3 of the support member 13312b are closely attached. It is necessary to let For this reason, it is necessary to strictly manage the dimensional relationship. However, due to variations in molding of the support member 13312b and the flange member 13312c, the bottom surface of the flange portion 1312c2 may be moved to the upper side of the upper surface of the locking convex portion 13312b3 only by being normally fitted. There is a possibility that the rear surface of the flange portion 13312c2 (the surface on the right side of FIG. 88 (f)) and the locking convex portion 13312b3 come into contact with each other and the support member stops halfway.

  In the present embodiment, by concentrating and pushing the force into the recessed portion 13312c5 disposed on the flange member 13312c, the flange member 13312c is deformed with a relatively small force, and the lower surface of the flange portion 13312c1 is the locking convex portion. It can be pushed into the back side frame member 13311 until it goes above the upper surface of 13312b3.

  Further, even when the flange member 13312c is damaged or the attachment of the flange member 13312c is forgotten, the support member 13312b moves until it is pressed against the wall portion on the opposite side of the guide hole 13311b by the elastic force of the coil spring SP13. The insertion hole 13311e is closed. Thereby, the improper act which makes a wire penetrate | invade from the collar part insertion hole 13311e can be suppressed.

  Next, the function of the posture correcting device 13312 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a) and 89 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 89A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position, and FIG. 89B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. .

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the upward position, the lens member 13317 moves in the direction Y13a (the linear direction passing through the shaft support bar 363, and the vibration device 366 is displaced). The operation direction U13a in which the player pushes the lens member 13317 in the same direction as the direction) will be described. Note that the smaller the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a, the easier the operation becomes (the wrist can be pushed in without being returned).

  From the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), by rotating the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79), the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates, and the lever member 13340 is rotated to the downward position shown in FIG. 89 (b).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), when the swing operation member 13310 is moved from the upward position to the downward position, the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the upward position. The lever member 13340 is rotated by an angle θ13x formed by a straight line X13a parallel to the straight line X13b and a straight line X13b parallel to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 13340 when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position.

  Here, when the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 are not relatively displaced, when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the angle between the direction Y13a and the operation direction U13a becomes an angle θ13x.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the tip of the protruding portion 13312a1 of the contact member 13312a contacts the wall member 13322b, and the swing operation is performed on the lever member 13340. The member 13310 is rotated by an angle θ13y clockwise in FIG. 89 (a). The angle θ13y is set to the same angle as the angle at which the main body member 361 of the swinging member 360 can rotate.

  When the swing operation member 13310 is swung with respect to the lever member 13340, the direction in which the lens member 13317 moves is changed to the direction Y13b (the angle formed by the direction Y13a and the direction Y13b is an angle θ13y). Therefore, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the direction Y13b in which the lens member 13317 moves is moved toward the operation direction U13a (the angle between the direction in which the lens member 13317 is moved and the operation direction U13a is reduced). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a change in the feeling of operation and a situation in which it is difficult for the player to press the lens member 13317.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is achieved by disposing the posture correction device 13312 inside the swing operation member 13310. Therefore, the structure can be simplified as compared with the case where a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force to the swing operation member 13310 is provided inside the lever member 13340.

  Further, since the posture changes at the timing when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is continued while the lever member 13340 is rotated. Thus, it is possible to easily suggest a timing for pushing the lens member 317 to the player. That is, for example, by displaying “press” on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) in accordance with the timing at which the swing operation member 13310 changes its posture with respect to the lever member 13340, the third symbol is displayed. The display of the display device 81 and the movement of the operation device 13310 can be linked, and the player can be notified of the timing at which the player should press the lens member 13317 in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, the posture correcting device 13312 has a function of applying a load to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340. The force applied to the swing operation member 13310 from the posture correction device 13312 is a lever member. It occurs in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of 13340 (when the lever member 13340 rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 89 (b), a load is generated that rotates the swing operation member 13310 clockwise in FIG. 89 (b)). Accordingly, the force generated by the posture correcting device 13312 to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 also functions as a force for braking the lever member 13340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lever member 13340 from excessively rotating and preventing the rear end portion of the lever member 13340 (the right end portion in FIG. 89 (b)) from colliding with the inner case member 13330.

  Note that the wall member 13322b with which the posture correcting device 13312 abuts can also abut against the lever member 13340 when the lever member 13340 is about to rotate counterclockwise (further rotation from the state of FIG. 89 (b)). It is arranged in the position. Thereby, even when the player applies an overload to the lens member 13317, the wall member 13322b can prevent the lever member 13340 from over-rotating.

  Here, it is also possible to connect a gear from the rotation shaft of the lever member 13340 to the swing operation member 13310 along the lever member 13340 and to rotate the swing operation member 13310 by the meshing rotation of the gear group. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the swinging operation member 13310 changes its posture by the contact member 13312a protruding from the swinging operation member 13310 coming into contact with the wall member 13322b, so that it is disposed on the lever member 13340. The weight of the gear group can be saved. Therefore, the lever member 13340 can be reduced in weight, and the driving force of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the elastic force (displacement in the torsional direction) of the torsion spring SP2 that biases the swing operation member 13310 is compared with a state in which it is disposed at the upward position. The state of being placed in the downward position is enlarged. Further, in the downward position, a force is applied from the posture correcting device 13312 to the swing operation member 13310 in such a manner as to rotate the swing operation member 13310 in a direction opposite to the biasing direction of the torsion spring SP2.

  Therefore, the force for fixing the swing operation member 13310 so as not to be relatively displaced with respect to the lever member 13340 is greater than the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position. The state of being placed in is larger. Therefore, the lever member 13340 has a state (upward position) in which the rotation resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 is small (light) and a state (downward position) in which the rotation resistance is large (heavy). Can be formed.

  For example, when an operation of hitting the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) is performed when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is weak, and the swing operation member 13310 is moved by the recoil. While the lever member 13340 can be rotated in a staggered manner, the swinging operation member 13310 can be operated when the lens member 13317 is tapped when the swinging operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. As the rotational resistance of the lever member 13340 increases, the swinging operation member 13310 can be hardened against the lever member 13340. For example, when the lens member 13317 is continuously hit, it can be prevented from being hit. .

  Note that the change in the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in the present embodiment is caused by the change in the position of the lever member 13340, and the action does not change depending on the moving speed of the lever member 13340.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, a change in posture of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position will be described. 90 (a) and 90 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 13300 along the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line in FIG. 17 (a). 90 (a) and 90 (b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position, and in FIG. 90 (a), the contact member 13312a contacts the wall member 13322b. In FIG. 90B, a force is applied to the swing operation member 13310 even after the lens member 13317 is pushed in, and the coil spring SP13 of the posture correcting device 13312 is contracted. A state in which the swing operation member 13310 is tilted forward is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the lens member 13317 is overloaded, the posture correcting device 13312 is configured to be able to contract even when the lens member 13317 is overloaded. In addition, it is possible to change the posture of the swing operation member 13310 and to prevent the wall member 13322b from being damaged (penetrated and broken).

  Further, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated by pressing the tip of the contact member 13312a against the wall member 13322b, the displacement of the coil spring SP13 increases as the rotation angle increases, and the elastic force generated from the coil spring SP13 is affected by the displacement. Since it becomes proportionally large, it can suppress that the swing operation member 13310 rotates excessively.

  In the present embodiment, since the shaft support bar 363 that is the rotation shaft of the swing operation member 13310 is disposed on the directions Y13a and Y13b in which the lens member 13317 is pressed, the swing operation member is driven by the load for pressing the lens member 13317. Generation of a force for rotating 13310 can be suppressed.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the posture of the swing operation member 13310 is always changed when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. However, the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment does not swing. When the operation member 14310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 14310 can be switched between a case where the posture is changed and a case where the posture is not changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 91A is a front view of the lock member 14336 according to the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 91B is a side view of the lock member 14336 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIb in FIG. 91A.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the lock member 14336 is formed in a bar shape elongated in the vertical direction and has a main body member 14336a having a curved wall portion 5336a1 and a protruding portion 5336a2, a shaft support hole 5336b, and a main body member 14336a. And a locking member 14336c configured to be movable in the protruding direction.

  The locking member 14336c is fitted into the main body member 14336a so as to be retractable, and a biasing spring SP14a is disposed between the locking member 14336c and the main body member 14336a. It is arranged at a position where it can touch. The locking member 14336c includes a chamfered portion 14336c1 configured to be chamfered on the upper side surface.

  Therefore, when the unlocking cam member 5339 (see FIG. 92A) contacts the locking member 14336c from above, the locking member 14336c is pushed inward of the main body member 14336a along the chamfered portion 14336c1 (see FIG. The locking member 14336 can be rotated by pushing the locking member 14336c when it comes into contact with other than the upper side (for example, from the front side (from the left side in FIG. 91 (b)). .

  With reference to FIG. 92 (a), the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337 rotating in contact with the eccentric cam member 14333 will be described. FIG. 92A is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 taken along a line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, the eccentric cam member 14333 includes a main body portion 333a, a cylindrical portion 333b, a cam portion 14333c having a different shape in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 92A), and an umbrella portion. And 5333f.

  The cam portion 14333c includes a semicircular portion 14333c1 formed in a semicircular shape on the front side of FIG. 92A, and a semicircular portion on the left side of the semicircular portion 14333c1 (FIG. 92B). 14333c2, and a protruding portion 14333c2 protruding from the end of 14333c1.

  The protruding portion 14333c2 is configured such that the side surface in the circumferential direction is inclined with respect to the radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333. Therefore, when the projecting portion 14333c2 and the attitude switching device 14337 come into contact with each other, not only the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also the force generated in the radial direction (the eccentric cam shaft) This can also be caused by a load generated due to a distance relationship with 331d2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333.

  The posture switching device 14337 includes a main body member 14337a configured in a plate shape having an L-shaped cross section, an extending portion 14337b extending in a shape forming a fork from the side of the main body member 14337a, and the main body member 14337a, The posture of the main body member 14337a is maintained at an intermediate position by applying an elastic force to the end portion of the main body member 14337a and the shaft support section 14337c that pivotally supports the main body member 14337a and the extension section 14337b at the connecting portion with the extended section 14337b. And an elastic device 14337d.

  The main body member 14337a is configured such that an end portion opposite to an end portion pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 14337c can project from the inner case member 14330. In the state shown in FIG. 92A, the main body member 14337a is in a positional relationship (a positional relationship in which the load is applied at a distance of 0) where a load cannot be applied even if the main body member 14337a is in contact with the swing operation member 14310.

  The extending portion 14337b is disposed on the same plane as the umbrella portion 5333f as a position in the left-right direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 92A), and can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 14333c2 on the opposite side of the shaft support portion 14337c. 92 (a) is provided with a protruding portion 14337b1 protruding toward the front side of the drawing. Here, the protruding portion 14337b1 is disposed on the movement locus of the protruding portion 14333c2 in the state of FIG. 92A, and the main body member 14337a is rotated to the end (FIG. 93B or FIG. 95 (b)) at a position deviating from the movement locus of the projecting portion 14333c2.

  The elastic device 14337d has a case fixed to the inner side of the inner case member 14330, a portion contacting the main body member 14337a is recessed in a U-shape, and the position of the elastic device 14337d is changeable in a state where the recessed portion is urged by a coil spring. Composed. That is, even if the main body member 14337a is rotated, if the rotational force is removed, the position can be returned in a form converged to the concave portion of the V shape.

  FIG. 92B is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 14300 along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. In FIG. 92 (b), the drive gear 335b is rotated from the state of FIG. 92 (a), and the eccentric cam member 14333 and the unlocking cam member 5339 are rotated counterclockwise, whereby the lock member 14336 is rotated. The state in which the lever member 13340 is rotated and the swing operation member 14310 is disposed at the upward position is illustrated. That is, between FIG. 92A and FIG. 92B, the swing operation member 14310 is moved the same distance as the swing operation member 13310 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, compared with the thirteenth embodiment, the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and the guide hole formed to project the posture correcting device 13312 (see FIG. 80). A rear side frame member 14311 formed in a manner in which 13311b is closed is disposed on the rear side surface of the swing operation member 14310.

  93A and 93B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 14300 along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 92 (b) and the swing operation member 14310 is disposed at the downward position, and FIG. 93 (b). FIG. 93 illustrates a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 93A and the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 is rotated to the rotation end. If the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 93B, the state returns to the state shown in FIG.

  That is, in the driving state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 92A, no load is generated from the posture switching device 14337 to the swing operation member 14310, and the swing operation member 14310 is the lever member 13340. Move while maintaining the posture.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337 will be described. 94 (a) to 94 (c) are partial enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. In FIG. 94 (a), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated counterclockwise, and the protruding portion 14333c2 and the protruding portion 14337b1 are in contact with each other. FIG. 94 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state a) and the protruding portion 14337b1 is moved to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 side from the protruding portion 14333c2. The state immediately after the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 94 (b) and the contact between the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 is released is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 14333c2 and the protruding portion 14337b1 with the rotation angle of the extending portion 14337b being smaller than when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1. Can be released.

  That is, when the posture switching device 14337 is pushed by the semicircular portion 14333c1, the extending portion 14337b is continuously rotated until the protruding portion 14337b1 is pushed out from the rotation locus of the semicircular portion 14333c1.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the protruding portion 14337b1 can escape between the protruding portion 14333c2 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 (see FIG. 94B), the state shown in FIG. 94A Therefore, the contact between the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 can be released only by rotating the extending portion 14337b to the state shown in FIG. 94B (see FIG. 94C). Therefore, it is possible to reduce a region where the extended portion 14337b becomes a resistance to rotation of the eccentric cam member 14333, and to suppress a driving force for driving the eccentric cam member 14333.

  95 and 96, FIG. 95 (a), FIG. 95 (b), FIG. 96 (a) and FIG. 96 (b) are taken along the line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line in FIG. 17 (a). 5 is a partial cross-sectional view of an operation device 14300. FIG. In FIG. 95 (a), the swinging operation member 14310 is disposed in the downward position, and the projecting portion 14333c2 of the eccentric cam member 14333 is disposed below the projecting portion 14337b1 of the posture switching device (see FIG. 95). In FIG. 95 (b), the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 95 (a), and the projecting portion 14333c pushes the projecting portion 14337b1. FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the main body member 14337a of the posture switching member 14337 has been rotated to the rotation end, and FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 has been rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 96 (b) shows a state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 96 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, by rotating the eccentric cam member 14333 counterclockwise, the swing operation member 14310 can be swung through the posture switching device 14337 (FIG. 95B). reference). That is, only by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the operation state in which the swing operation member 14310 is swung in the downward position and the operation state in which the posture of the swing operation member 14310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is switched. Can do.

  As shown in FIG. 95B, when the eccentric cam member 14333 applies a load to the swing operation member 14310, the eccentric cam member 14333 does not apply a load to the lever member 13340. This is because a sufficient distance is provided between the lever member 13340 and the posture switching device 14337, and the lever member 13340, the posture switching device 14337, and the eccentric cam member 14333 are disposed in a positional relationship that does not contact at the same time. Accordingly, while it is possible to transmit the driving force to each of the plurality of members by the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to avoid the simultaneous transmission of them, so that the driving force of the driving motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is suppressed. Can do.

  Since the upper side surface of the convex portion 14333c2 (the side surface in contact with the convex portion 14337b1) is formed to be inclined with respect to the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, the convex portion 14333c2 and the posture switching device 14337 are formed. When abutting, the force that pushes the protruding portion 14337b1 is generated not only by the force in the circumferential direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 but also by a force generated in the radial direction (a load caused by a distance relationship with the eccentric cam shaft 331d2). Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load in the rotational direction generated on the eccentric cam member 14333.

  When the eccentric cam member 14333 further rotates clockwise from the state of FIG. 96 (b), the state returns to the state of FIG. 95 (a). At this time, the unlocking cam member 5339 is brought into contact with the locking member 14336 from above, so that the locking member 14336c (see FIG. 91) of the locking member 14336 is in an immersed state, and the rotation of the unlocking cam member 5339 is performed. Inhibition is prevented.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, by switching the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 14333, it is possible to switch whether or not the posture is changed in a state where the swing operation member 14310 is disposed in the downward position. The control of the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) can be loosened compared with the case where a load is applied to the swing operation member 14310 by disposing the eccentric cam member 14333 in a specific phase (slightly idle). However, no change in appearance can occur.)

  Here, the time until the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 92 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b) and the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 95 (a). Accordingly, the rotational speed of the eccentric cam member 14333 is determined by adjusting the time until the state changes to the state of FIG. 95B (by determining the stop positions of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 so as to match). If the rotation direction is changed as it is, the state shown in FIG. 92 (a) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 92 (b) at the same timing after the drive motor 335a (see FIG. 79) is driven. Either the state can be changed to the state shown in FIG. 95B.

  For example, the time until the change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) occurs rather than the time until the change to the state of FIG. 92 (b) occurs from the state of FIG. 92 (a). If the time is shorter, if there is no change from the state of FIG. 95 (a) to the state of FIG. 95 (b) after the operational vibration of the drive motor 335a is felt, the state shown in FIG. ) To the state shown in FIG. 92 (b), and it is possible to determine what operation the swing operation member 14310 performs next without paying attention to the movement of the swing operation member 14310. This will reduce the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the player feels the vibration of the drive motor 335a, whether the change from the state shown in FIG. 92A to the state shown in FIG. It can be made impossible to determine whether a change from the state of a) to the state of FIG. 95B occurs. Therefore, the player's attention to the swing operation member 14310 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 mesh with the same drive gear 335b and rotate synchronously has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, the eccentric cam member 14333 and the lock member 14336 may be rotated by different drive gears. Also in this case, the time from when one of the drive motors is operated until the swing operation member 14310 starts swinging (rotating clockwise in FIG. 92 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340, and the lever The same effect can be obtained by combining the time until the member 13340 starts rotating clockwise in FIG. 92 (a).

  In addition, even when the time required to start each operation is different, the first drive motor that takes a long time is rotated first, the second drive motor that takes a short time is rotated later, By stopping the driven first drive motor (the player feels the vibration of the second drive motor during this time), the player feels the vibration of the first drive motor that takes a long time. The operation by the two drive motors can be generated, and the player can be surprised.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the interlocking between the eccentric cam member 14333 and the attitude switching device 14337 will be described. 97 (a) to 97 (c) are partially enlarged views of the eccentric cam member 14333 and the posture switching device 14337. FIG. 97A shows a state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is rotated clockwise, and the projecting portion 14333c2 and the projecting portion 14337b1 start to contact each other. FIG. 97B shows the state shown in FIG. The state in which the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state a) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is moved closer to the outer periphery of the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in FIG. 97 (c). The state where the eccentric cam member 14333 is further rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state (b) and the projecting portion 14337b1 is in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 97, the upper surface of the projecting portion 14333c2 is inclined away from the straight line connecting the outer peripheral surface and the eccentric cam shaft 331d as it comes closer to the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 from the outer peripheral surface, so that the eccentric cam member 14333 rotates. Displacement causes the protruding portion 14337b1 to move in the axial radial direction of the eccentric cam member 14333 (a component in the axial radial direction of the load is dominant). Therefore, the load applied to the eccentric cam member 14333 (the load applied to the drive motor 335a) can be suppressed as compared with a case where resistance in the circumferential direction is generated in the eccentric cam member 14333.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97 (c), the load applied from the projecting portion 14337b to the eccentric cam member 14333 passes through the eccentric cam shaft 331d2, so that no force is generated to rotate the eccentric cam member 14333, and the drive motor 335a Even when the power is turned off, the load from the projecting portion 14337b can be countered. Therefore, the power consumption of the drive motor 335a can be reduced.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 cannot be removed from the outside of the back frame member 13311. However, the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment uses the contact member 13312a. A state of being pulled out from the outside of the back side frame member 13311 can be configured. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  98 (a) and 98 (b) are top views of the contact member 1512a in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 98 (c) is a back side frame on a line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line in FIG. FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view of the member 13311 and the posture correcting device 15312, and FIG. 98D is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 1512 along the line LXXXVIIId-LXXXVIIId in FIG.

  FIG. 98A shows a state where the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the overhanging member 13312a1 (locked state), and FIG. 98B shows a state where the flange member 15312a2 is extracted from the overhanging member 13312a1 (see FIG. 98B). The unplugged state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b), the abutting member 1531a is formed with a bar-like projecting member 1512a1 whose end is deformable, and a projecting member 151212a1 having a T-shaped cross section. And a flange member 15312a2 that deforms the projecting member 15312a1 by being embedded in the main body.

  The projecting member 15312a1 is made of a rubber material having a high elastic modulus, and mainly includes a long rod-like main body portion 1512a11 and a pair of deformable portions 1531a12 connected at the end in the short direction of one end of the main body portion 15312a11. Prepare. The connecting portion between the main body portion 15312a11 and the deformable portion 15312a12 is cut so as to be easily deformed, and the deformable portion 15312a12 is the main body portion in a state where the flange member 15312a2 is not embedded (see FIG. 98 (b)). It fits inside the width in the short direction of 1531a11.

  The flange member 15312a2 has a base portion 15312a21 formed with a size that fits between the pair of support member guide walls 13311f, and a distance between connecting portions of the main body portion 15312a11 of the projecting member 15312a1 and the deformable portion 15312a12 from the base portion 15312a21. And a projecting portion 1531a22 projecting with a short width.

  With such a configuration, when the projecting portion 1512a22 of the flange member 15312a2 is embedded in the projecting member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 of the projecting member 15312a1 is brought into a locked state (see FIG. 98A). When the flange member 15312a2 is separated from the projecting member 15312a1, the deformed portion 15312a12 is pulled out inward (see FIG. 98 (b)).

  98 (c) and 98 (d) show a state in which the flange member 13312c is assembled to the back side outer frame member 13311. In this state, the coil spring SP13 is made shorter than the natural length, so that a load for embedding the flange member 1512a2 from the coil spring SP13 into the overhanging member 1512a1 can be generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the contact member 1512a is in a locked state. In this locked state, even if an attempt is made to pull out the overhanging member 15312a1, the deformable portion 15312a12 is caught and cannot be pulled out. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1 and the injustice of pulling out the overhanging member 15312a1.

  99 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back side frame member 13311 and the posture correcting device 1531 along the line corresponding to the LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb line of FIG. 87, and FIG. 99 (b) is a cross-sectional view of LXXXIXb− of FIG. 99 (a). It is sectional drawing of the back side frame member 13311 and the attitude | position correction apparatus 1531 in a LXXXIXb line.

  99 (a) and 99 (b) illustrate a state in which the collar member 13312c is removed from the back frame member 13311 and the support member 13312b is slid into the space occupied by the collar member 13312c. .

  In the state shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the coil spring SP13 is longer than the natural length, so that the force for pressing the flange member 1512a2 against the projecting member 1512a1 does not occur, and the deformed portion 15312a12 has a shape. By returning (returning to the state of FIG. 98 (b)), the contact member 1512a is pulled out. As a result, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be extracted from the outside (right side of FIG. 99 (b)) of the back side frame member 13311.

  That is, the projecting member 15312a1 can be replaced simply by laterally sliding the support member 13312b without separating the support member 13312b from the rear frame member 13311. Therefore, for example, many members are arranged inside the back frame member 13311, and even if the support member 13312b cannot be separated from the guide bottom wall 13311d, it collides with other members and is easily damaged. A certain overhanging member 15312a1 can be replaced, and the maintainability can be improved.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the force of pushing the contact member 15312a to the outside of the rear side frame member 13311 is reduced by the movement of the support member 13312b due to the detachment of the heel member 13312c. It is possible to prevent the contact member 1512a from being similarly damaged when a large load is applied to the flange member 13312c from the support member 13312b such that the 13312c breaks.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the collar member 13312c is dropped, the contact member 15312a can be pulled out, so that replacement can be performed quickly. For example, the fatigue strength is designed so that the flange member 13312c falls off when the abutting member 1512a collides with the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) a predetermined number of times that the fatigue strength is weighted in consideration of safety. Accordingly, it is possible to determine the replacement time of the contact member 1531a with the dropout of the collar member 13312c as a mark. Further, in the state in which the collar member 13312c is dropped, the overhanging member 15312a1 can be extracted from the outside of the back side frame member 13311. Therefore, replacement can be easily performed, and maintenance performance can be improved.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the elastic force of the torsion spring SP1 that biases the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on whether the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position or the downward position, and the neck Although the case where the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes has been described, the operation device 16300 according to the sixteenth embodiment additionally operates the swing operation member 16310 by changing the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310. The feeling can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 100A to FIG. 100D are side views of the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment. 100 (a) to 100 (d), an external view of the swing operation member 16310 is illustrated, a cross-sectional view of the lever member 13340 is schematically illustrated, and other portions are schematically imagined. Illustrated with lines.

  100 (a) and 100 (b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the upward position, and in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), the swing operation member 16310 is downward. The state of being placed in position is shown. 100 (a) and 100 (c), the swinging operation member 16310 is disposed at the moving end on the forward rotation side (counterclockwise side in FIG. 100 (a)) with respect to the lever member 13340. In FIG. 100 (b) and FIG. 100 (d), the state where the swing operation member 16310 is arranged at the moving end on the reverse side (FIG. 100 (a) clockwise side) with respect to the lever member 13340 is shown. Illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the swinging operation member 16310 hides the back side frame member 13311, the posture correction device 13312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, and the fastening portions of the front cover 13313 and the back cover 13314. At the same time, the protection cover 13316 (see FIG. 13) is interposed between the separation prevention cover 16315 having the iron ball 16315e that changes the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 and the rear side frame member 13311 disposed below the separation prevention cover 16315. 82) and a lens member 13317.

  The separation prevention cover 16315 includes a receiving recess 13315a and a retaining hole 13315b (see FIG. 82), and a wall surface of the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313 from the lower end of the disk portion in the front-rear direction (FIG. 100 (a) left-right direction). An extended portion 16315c extending along the side, a long groove 16315d disposed in a long groove shape on a side surface of the extended portion 16315c facing the back side frame member 13311 and the front cover 13313, and the inside of the long groove 16315d And an iron ball 16315e that is movably disposed.

  The long groove 16315d is a groove for rolling the iron ball 16315e disposed therein by gravity, and in FIG. 100 (a), the right end portion is more distant from the shaft support rod 363 than the left end portion. The distance is shortened.

  Further, the angle θ13y for rotating the swing operation member 16310 from the forward rotation side end portion to the reverse rotation side end portion is 10 degrees (θ13y = 10 °), and the rotation angle of the lever member 13340 is 34 degrees. By setting the angle θ16a of the long groove 16315d at 100 (a) to be less than 24 ° with respect to the horizontal direction (left and right direction in FIG. 100 (a)) (θ16a <24 °), the swing operation member 16310 is disposed at the upward position. In this case, the position of the iron ball 16315e can be maintained with respect to the swing operation of the swing operation member 16310 (maintaining the vertical relationship between the left and right ends of the long groove 16315d). Is possible). In the present embodiment, the angle θ16a is set to about 10 degrees.

  The iron ball 16315e is a spherical member made of iron and can bear most of the weight of the swing operation member 16310. Therefore, when the iron ball 16315e moves, the position of the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 changes.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b), in the state where the swing operation member 16310 is disposed at the upward position, the iron ball 16315e is disposed at the right end portion of the long groove 16315d and the position of the center of gravity is the pivot rod 363. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d), in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position, the iron ball 16315e is disposed at the left end portion of the long groove 16315d, and the center of gravity is The position is moved away from the pivot bar 363.

  That is, the distance from the pivot support 363 to the center of gravity position of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is disposed at the upward position or the downward position. Thereby, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 16310 can be changed.

  For example, in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position than in the case where the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the upward position, the position of the center of gravity is far from the pivot bar 363 and the moment about the axis of the swing operation member 16310 is (FIG. 100 (c) counterclockwise moment) can be increased.

  Therefore, in a state where the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position (see FIGS. 100C and 100D), the swing operation member 16310 is moved forward by the player pushing the lens member 13317. After rotating in the rolling direction (after rotating from the state shown in FIG. 100D to the state shown in FIG. 100C), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 is returned by the load generated from the posture correcting device 13312 (FIG. 100C). ) To the state shown in FIG. 100D) can be made longer (to return slowly) than when the center of gravity of the swing operation member 16310 is arranged near the rotation axis. Can be).

  Thereby, when the swing operation member 16310 is disposed at the upward position, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 with respect to the lever member 13340 is the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 (see FIG. 89) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position, the rotational resistance that rotates in the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 rises (clockwise in FIG. 100C) can be increased. . In this case, since the player performs an operation of hitting the lens member 13317 and the swing operation member 16310 is in the state shown in FIG. 100C, it takes a long time to return to the state shown in FIG. Even when the player strikes the lens member 13317 again (when repeatedly hitting), the posture of the swing operation member 16310 can be maintained in the state shown in FIG. 100C, and immediately from the state shown in FIG. Compared with the case where the state returns to the state of FIG. 100D, the continuous striking operation of the lens member 13317 can be facilitated.

  Further, referring to the point of change in rotational resistance due to the difference in the rotation direction of the swing operation member 16310, when the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the upward position, the swing operation member 16310 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Since the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is rotated is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward, the rotational resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of rotating counterclockwise in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position, the direction in which the swing operation member 16310 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 100C is the direction in which the iron ball 16315e is moved downward. As compared with the case of rotating clockwise in FIG. 100 (c), the rotation resistance can be reduced.

  Accordingly, the direction in which the rotational resistance when rotating the swing operation member 16310 is reduced depending on whether the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the downward position or the swing operation member 16310 is disposed in the upward position. Can be reversed.

  According to the present embodiment, the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is changed by the movement of the iron ball 16315e (due to a change in the situation inside the swing operation member 16310). Compared with the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 16310 is increased by applying a load in the direction, the load applied to the swing operation member 16310 can be reduced.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes due to the change in torsion of the torsion spring SP2. However, the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment has the swing member 17360. And the wall member 17322b are rubbed to change the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  101 (a) and 101 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 101A illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position, and FIG. 101B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. . 101 (a) and 101 (b) show a state in which the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and a swing operation member with respect to the lever member 13340, respectively. The state where 13310 is rotated forward is shown.

  In this embodiment, a swinging member 17360 is pivotally supported at the tip of the lever member 13340 instead of the swinging member 360 in the first embodiment. The swinging member 17360 mainly includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 17362 formed so as to rub against the wall member 17322b, a shaft support bar 363, a buffer member 364, a regulation bar 365, and a vibration device 366. (See FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 17362 includes a friction arm portion 17362c extending in the radial direction of the shaft hole 362b1 through which the shaft support rod 363 is inserted from the side wall portion 362b.

  Further, the wall member 17322b is fitted between the right front cover 13322 and the left front cover 13321 instead of the wall member 13322b of the thirteenth embodiment (see FIG. 78). The wall member 17322b includes an extending portion 17322b1 extending upward from the upper end portion thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 101A and 101B, the extending portion 17322b1 does not contact the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position, and the swing operation member 13310 is not in contact with the friction arm portion 17362c. Is formed in such a manner as to come into contact with the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where is disposed in the downward position. That is, as shown in FIG. 101B, the extending portion 17322b1 has a contact surface that is pressed against the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. It is formed in an arc shape centering on 363. Thereby, the contact area of the extension part 17322b1 and the friction arm part 17362c can be ensured, and sufficient dynamic friction force can be exhibited. Accordingly, since the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 increases due to the increase in rotational resistance of the motor fixing plate 17362 due to the dynamic friction force, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Since the change in the operational feeling described above changes depending on the position of the lever member 13340, the amount of change does not change depending on the operating speed of the lever member 13340. Therefore, regardless of whether the swing operation member 13310 is swung at a high speed or the swing operation member 13310 is operated slowly, if the tip of the lever member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 13310 is operated. Since a dynamic friction force can be applied in the same manner to the rotation of the motor, a change in operational feeling can be reliably generated.

  Further, the dynamic friction force changes depending on the pressing force, and does not change depending on the rotation speed of the motor fixing plate 17362. Therefore, in the state where the tip of the friction arm portion 17362c is pressed against the extending portion 17322b1. Even when the rotation speed is low (for example, when rotation is started), a sufficient dynamic friction force can be generated.

  In this embodiment, since the extending portion 17322b1 is disposed on the wall member 17322b, the members that need to be replaced when the extending portion 17322b1 is damaged may be limited to the left front cover 13321 and the right front cover 13322. it can. Therefore, the replacement of the wall member 17322b can be facilitated and the maintainability can be improved.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 changes depending on the arrangement of the lever member 13340 has been described. However, the operation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment has a driving force via the eccentric cam member 5333. Is transmitted to the swinging member 18360, whereby the rotational resistance of the swinging operation member 13310 can be changed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  102 (a) to 102 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 18300 in the eighteenth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 102 (a) to 102 (c) show a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position, and the illustration of the torsion spring SP2 is omitted, and the lower cover member 345 (FIG. 81) is shown. The state in which (see) is removed is illustrated. Further, a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is rotated forward with respect to the lever member 18340 is illustrated.

  The operation device 18300 in this embodiment includes a swing member 18360 that is disposed inside the swing operation member 13310 and rotates integrally with the swing operation member 13310, and a lever member 18340 that pivotally supports the swing member 18360. , At least as a part different from the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The swinging member 18360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 18362 having a thin wall portion 18362c extending from the side wall portion 362b along the opening direction of the shaft hole 362b1, a shaft support rod 363, a buffer member 364, and the like. The control rod 365 and the vibration device 366 are mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

  The thin wall portion 18362c is a portion disposed around the shaft support rod 363 in the assembled state (see FIG. 102A). In the present embodiment, the thin wall portion 18362c is used as the shaft support rod 363. A rubber band RB capable of generating a load in the pressing direction is wound around the thin wall portion 18362c.

  The rubber band RB is a band-shaped member formed of a rubber material, and both ends thereof are pin-fixed around the lever support shaft 331d1 so as not to move. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 13310 is rotated, sliding friction is generated between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB.

  The lever member 18340 includes a main body member 18341 having a transmission device 18347 configured to be movable by being in contact with the eccentric cam member 5333 instead of the main body member 13341 of the thirteenth embodiment.

  The main body member 18341 sandwiches a long hole 18341h extending obliquely with respect to the longitudinal direction of the lever member 18340 and an extending direction of the long hole 18341h in a side wall portion of the main body portion 18341a formed in a U-shaped cross section. And a pair of guide wall portions 18341i disposed in parallel in the aspect. As shown in FIG. 102A, the long hole 18341h is extended to a position where it interferes with the rubber band RB.

  The transmission device 18347 is supported by a pushing portion 18347a having a convex portion inserted through the long hole 18341h and having a size capable of sliding between the guide wall portions 18341i, and a lower end portion of the pushing portion 18347a. Adjustment portion 18347b, and an overhang portion 18347c that protrudes from the lower end portion of push-in portion 18347a along one side surface of adjustment portion 18347b (in the present embodiment, along the upper side surface). In the present embodiment, the adjusting portion 18347b is maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 102A (the posture in which the adjusting portion 18347b is in contact with the overhang portion 18347c) by a biasing spring (not shown) with respect to the pushing portion 18347a.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position, the long hole 18241h and the guide are in a positional relationship where the adjusting portion 18347b and the eccentric cam member 5333 collide while the eccentric cam member 5333 rotates. A wall 18341i is provided.

  By extending the overhanging portion 18347c beyond the axial support position of the adjusting portion 18347b, it is possible to prevent the adjusting portion 18347b from rotating in a direction close to the overhanging portion 18347c. Therefore, it is possible to create a direction in which the adjustment unit 18347b easily rotates with respect to the push-in unit 18347a and a direction in which the adjustment unit 18347b does not easily rotate.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to switch whether or not to change the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position.

  That is, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the driving force is used to rotate the adjusting portion 18347b relative to the pushing portion 18347a. The portion 18347a does not move along the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102B). Therefore, there is no change in the state of the rubber band RB, and no change in the rotational resistance of the swing operation member 13310 occurs.

  On the other hand, when the eccentric cam member 5333 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 102 (a) from the state of FIG. 102 (a), the adjusting portion 18347b is locked in the rotation direction to the overhanging portion 18347c, and the adjusting portion 18347b is pushed in the pushing portion 18347a. However, the driving force is used to move the long hole 18341h (see FIG. 102C). In this case, since the pushing portion 18347a deforms in the direction of extending the rubber band RB, the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB are more closely attached, and the sliding resistance between the thin wall portion 18362c and the rubber band RB is increased. . Accordingly, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 changes.

  Accordingly, even if the appearance is the same as the state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position, the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member 5333 is switched to switch between operating the transmission device 18347 or stopping it. Thus, the operational feeling of the swing operation member 13310 can be changed.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case where the load generated from the posture correction device 13312 is applied only to the swing operation member 13310 has been described, but the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment applies the load generated from the posture correction device 13312. The lever member 19340 can also be affected. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  103 (a) and 103 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 19300 in the nineteenth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a). 103 (a) and 103 (b) illustrate a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position, and in FIG. 103 (a), the player changes the swing operation member 13310 to the swing operation member 13310. FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which no force is applied, and FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which a force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). Illustrated.

  The lever member 19340 is configured in such a manner that the lever member 13340 is added only from the side wall of the lower cover member 345 of the lever member 13340 according to the thirteenth embodiment. The locking projection 19345e is disposed at a position that falls on the rotation locus of the rotation lever 19337b in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position.

  As shown in FIG. 103A, in this embodiment, an inner case member 19330 is disposed instead of the inner case member 13330. The inner case member 19330 is configured in such a manner that a transmission device 19337 is added inside the inner case member 13330.

  The transmission device 19337 is supported by the rotation shaft 19337a of the left cover member 13331 and is formed in an L-shaped cross section, and the rotation direction of the rotation lever 19337b is fixed to the left cover member 13331 (FIG. 103 (a). And a torsion spring SP19 that generates an urging force counterclockwise).

  When the rotation lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the urging direction (see FIG. 103 (a)), the posture maintaining unit 19337b1 that contacts the inner surface of the front wall surface of the left cover member 13331, and its posture maintenance When the rotary lever 19337b is positioned at the rotation end in the urging direction while being bent from the rod-shaped portion having the portion 19337b1, the surface and the surface position where the tip end abuts against the abutting member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 of the left front cover 13321 The contact part 19337b2 arrange | positioned by this is mainly provided. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the wall member 13322b (see FIG. 78) is omitted, and an opening is formed in the inner case member 19330, so that the contact member 13312a and the contact portion 19337b2 are inside the opening. And are configured to be able to contact each other.

  With these configurations, the load applied to the swing operation member 13310 can be used as a load for suppressing the vibration of the lever member 19340. This will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at a downward position in a state where the player does not apply a load to the swing operation member 13310 (for example, the eccentric cam member 5333 (see FIG. 89)). ), The contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 is pushed by the contact portion 19337b2 of the transmission device 19337, and the swing operation member 13310 rotates with respect to the lever member 19340. (The state shown in FIG. 103 (a) is obtained). In this state, the rotating lever 19337b is not in contact with the lever member 19340 and no load is transmitted, so that the driving force for driving the rotating lever 19337b can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the player performs an operation of rotating the swing operation member 13310 from the state of FIG. 103 (a), if the load at that time exceeds the urging force of the torsion spring SP19. The contact member 13312a of the posture correcting device 13312 rotates the rotation lever 19337b of the transmission device 19337. In this case, when the rotation lever 19337b contacts the locking projection 19345e in the rotation direction, the reaction operation in the rotation direction of the lever member 19340 via the rotation lever 19337b (operation that rotates clockwise in FIG. 103 (b)). ) Can be suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, when the player strikes the lens member 13317 (see FIG. 77) of the swing operation member 13310, a load is applied in the direction in which the lever member 19340 is raised by the reaction, and the rear end portion of the lever member 19340 is moved from below. Although an overload may be applied to the supporting lock member 5336 (see FIG. 12B), in the present embodiment, the rotation lever 19337b is configured to be able to suppress the rotation of the lever member 19340. The load that is generated can be reduced.

  Further, when the rotating lever 19337b contacts the lever member 19340, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 increases and the driving force for driving the lever member 19340 may become unnecessarily large. In this embodiment, the lens member 13317 is used. Since the rotation lever 19337b can be brought into contact with the lever member 19340 only when an overload is applied (see FIG. 77), it is usually possible (for example, when the player does not touch the swing operation member 13310). The rotation resistance of the lever member 19340 can be maintained in a low state.

  As a result, while the driving force of the lever member 19340 is suppressed, when an overload is applied, the rotational resistance of the lever member 19340 is temporarily increased, thereby causing the lock member 5336 (see FIG. 89B). The applied load can be suppressed and the durability of the lock member 5336 can be improved.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the posture correction device 13312 that rotates the swing operation member 13310 in the direction to rise is operated linearly. However, the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment is operated by the posture correction device 20312. It is configured as a moving device. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  104 (a) and 104 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 20300 in the twentieth embodiment along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. It is a rear view of the swing operation member 20310 in the arrow CV direction view of a).

  104 (a) and 104 (b) show a state in which the swing operation member 20310 is disposed in the downward position, and in FIG. 104 (a), the player moves the swing operation member 13310 to the swing operation member 13310. FIG. 104 (b) shows a state where the force is not applied and the swing operation member 20310 is rotated in the backward rotation direction. In FIG. 104 (b), force is applied from the player to the swing operation member 13310 and the forward rotation direction (FIG. 104 ( The state where the swing operation member 20310 is rotated counterclockwise (b) is illustrated.

  The swing operation member 20310 has a cup-like (outside approximate to the back side frame member 13311) back side frame member 20311 and a back side frame member 20311 which are provided below the swing member 366. The posture correcting device 20312, the front cover 13313, the back cover 13314, the separation preventing cover 13315, the protective cover 13316, and the lens member 13317 are mainly provided (see FIG. 82).

  The back frame member 20311 includes a functional wall portion 20311c that is a partition that divides the opening on the back surface into an insertion hole 311a and an operation region hole 20311b that opens a region in which the posture correction device 20312 operates.

  The functional wall portion 20311c is recessed with a slightly larger width than the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the posture correcting device 20312 from the back side to the front side, and is formed so as to be able to support the shaft rod portion 20312a1. From the recessed portion 20311c1 above the recessed portion 20311c1, the recessed portion 20311c2 to be recessed in a cross-sectional fan shape (a shape in which the width becomes wider as it becomes deeper from the entrance), and the recessed portion 20311c1 of the recessed portion 20311c2 And a locking projection 20311c3 protruding from the inner side surface on the far side.

  The posture correcting device 20312 mainly includes a main body member 20312a having a J-shaped cross section, and a leaf spring-like plate spring member 20312b assembled with the main body member 20312a in a manner of passing through the opening 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. Prepare for.

  The main body member 20312a includes a shaft rod portion 20312a1 that is pivotally supported by the recessed portion 20311c1, a flat plate portion 20312a2 that is formed in a flat plate shape with the shaft rod portion 20312a1 disposed at the end, and the shaft rod portion 20312a1 and the flat plate portion. An opening 20312a3 that is formed between 20312a2, a curved portion 20312a4 that is curved from the lower end of the flat plate portion 20312a2, and a sandwiching member that is recessed so that the leaf spring member 20312b can be sandwiched at the tip of the curved portion 20312a4 And a recess 20312a5.

  The side surface of the recessed portion 20311c2 that is far from the recessed portion 20311c1 is disposed in parallel with the wall portion where the recessed portion 20111c1 is recessed, and the vertical interval between them is determined by the thickness of the leaf spring member 20312b. Is also made slightly larger.

  The leaf spring member 20312b is set to have a thickness smaller than the entrance dimension of the insertion recess 20311c2 and a width smaller than the opening 20312a3, and is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2 in the assembled state and is provided with a recess. The upper portion 20312b1 that presses the shaft rod portion 20312a1 fitted into the 20311c1 so as not to be pulled out, and the lower portion of the upper portion 20312b1 (located at the upper end portion of the opening 20312a3) are bent and the opening 20312a3 faces inward. The lower part 20312b2 extended in a penetrating manner and inserted into the holding recess 20312a5, and the locking hole 20312b3 formed in the upper part 20312b1 are mainly provided. In this embodiment, the leaf spring member 20312b is biased in a direction in which bending is moderated (a direction in which the lower end portion of FIG. 104 (a) rotates and rubs counterclockwise).

  The locking hole 20312b3 is a hole in which the locking protrusion 20311c3 is hooked in a state where the leaf spring member 20312b is inserted into the inserted recess 20311c2. Therefore, even when an outward load (rightward in FIG. 104 (a)) is applied to the leaf spring member 20312b in the assembled state, the leaf spring member 20312b can be prevented from falling off the inserted recess 20311c2. .

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the main body member 20312a from dropping from the recessed portion 20311c1 due to the elastic force of the leaf spring member 20312b. That is, when the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a is moved in the direction of dropping, the leaf spring member 20312b needs to be moved together. Since the plate spring member 20312b cannot be moved because it is in the direction of biting into the portion 20311c3, it is possible to prevent the shaft rod portion 20312a1 of the main body member 20312a from dropping from the recessed portion 20311c1.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when the main body member 20312a receives a load from the wall member 13322b and is pushed into the rear side frame member 20311, the plate spring member 20312b is increased in urging force. Since the spring member 20312b is displaced, it becomes more difficult to drop the shaft bar portion 20312a1 from the recessed portion 20311c1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the posture correcting device 2031 during the game while not using any fastening member such as a screw.

  Here, when an overload occurs between the wall member 13322b and the main body member 20312a and the main body member 20312a is cracked, the lower end portion of the main body member 20312a is not locked to the lower end portion of the operation region hole 20311b. The leaf spring member 20312b is deformed to a position where the bending is eliminated. Therefore, since the leaf spring member 20312b is exposed outside the rear side frame member 20311, the difference from the normal state is large, and the necessity of maintenance can be easily determined by appearance inspection.

  In addition, as a method of assembling the posture correcting device 20312 to the functional wall portion 20311c, first, the shaft rod portion 20312a1 is fitted into the recessed portion 20311c1 in a state where the plate spring member 20312b is inserted into the opening portion 20312a3 of the main body member 20312a. At this time, the leaf spring member 20312b is not yet inserted into the holding recess 20312a5.

  Next, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b that can freely move inside the opening 20312a3 is inserted into the insertion recess 20311c2.

  Finally, by pulling the lower part 20312b2 of the leaf spring member 20312b downward from the inner side of the back side frame member 20311 and inserting it into the holding recess 20312a5, the state of FIG. 104 (a) can be formed. In this state, the upper portion 20312b1 of the leaf spring member 20312b is rotated in the direction in which the inner side of the insertion recessed portion 20311c2 is close to the engaging convex portion 20311c3 with the side surface where the recessed portion 20311c1 is provided as a fulcrum, 20312b3 is hooked on the locking projection 20311c3. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the upper portion 20312b1 from falling off the inserted recess 20311c2.

  As described above, if the leaf spring member 20312b is touched from the inside of the back side frame member 20311, the assembly and removal are easy (the lower side portion 20312b2 may be deformed), but the back side frame member is in an assembled state. When the leaf spring member 20312b is touched only from the outside of the 20311, the removal becomes difficult.

  Therefore, when the rear side frame member 20311 is removed and the posture correction device 20312 is removed from the inside as during maintenance, the operation can be performed quickly and easily, and the posture correction is performed from the outside of the rear side frame member 20311. Unauthorized actions such as removing the device 20312 can be made difficult.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the motor fixing plate 17362 rubs against the wall member 17322b has been described. However, in the operation device 21300 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the motor fixing plate 21362 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the lever member 13340. Consists of. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  106 (a) and 106 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 21300 in the twenty-first embodiment along a line corresponding to the XVIIIa-XVIIIa line in FIG. 17 (a). 106 (a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the upward position, and FIG. 106 (b) illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed at the downward position. . 106 (a) and 106 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. 106 (a), the lever member 13340 In contrast, FIG. 106B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated forward, and FIG. 106B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated backward relative to the lever member 13340. The

  As shown in FIG. 106, the wall member 21322b includes an extended slide portion 21322b2 that extends forward and upward (in the obliquely upper left direction in FIG. 106 (a)) and is disposed inside the pair of friction arm portions 17362c.

  The extending slide portion 21322b2 includes a long hole 21322b21 that is formed in the left-right direction (the direction perpendicular to the drawing in FIG. 106) and extends in the up-down direction. The groove portion 21322b21 is disposed at a position where the projecting pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106A, and from the position outside the arc passing through the position centering on the lever support shaft 331d1. Is extended in such a manner that the distance from the lever support shaft 331d1 increases as it goes downward, and the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 can be inserted in the state shown in FIG. 106 (b).

  The swinging member 21360 includes a main body member 361, a motor fixing plate 21362 having a shape similar to the motor fixing plate 362, a shaft support bar 363, a buffer member 364, a regulation bar 365, a vibration device 366, Is mainly provided (see FIG. 81).

  The motor fixing plate 21362 mainly includes a main body portion 362a, a side wall portion 362b, a pair of friction arm portions 17362b, and a protruding pin 21362d protruding inward from the pair of friction arm portions 17362b.

  In the present embodiment, since the protruding pin 21362d is inserted into the long hole 21322b21, the movement mode of the swing operation member 13310 with respect to the lever member 13340 according to the rotation of the lever member 13340 is changed by setting the shape of the long hole 21322b21. be able to. For example, the elongated hole 21322b21 has a shape equivalent to an arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the lever member 13340 is rotated with respect to the lever support shaft 331d1 with respect to the lever member 13340 of the swing operation member 13310. There can be no displacement.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the elongated hole 21322b21 is extended in a direction inclined with respect to the arc centered on the lever support shaft 331d1, so that the protrusion is caused by the rotation of the lever member 13340. The motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated so as to fill the displacement of the fitting position generated between the installation pin 21362d and the long hole 21322b21. Accordingly, if the motor fixing plate 21362 is rotated (in a rotatable direction, that is, from the state shown in FIG. 106 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 106 (b)) in conjunction with (in conjunction with) the rotation of the lever member 13340. 106 (a) (clockwise), the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated. Accordingly, the lever member 13340 and the swing operation member 13310 can be rotated in conjunction with each other.

  Next, a twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the 21st embodiment described above, the case where the swing operation member 13310 is changed in posture by the protruding pin 21362d of the motor fixing plate 21362 being guided by the groove portion 21322b21 has been described, but the operation device 22300 in the 22nd embodiment is The posture change of the swing operation member 13310 is caused by the gear rotation. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  107 (a) and 107 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 22300 in the twenty-second embodiment along the line corresponding to the line XVIIIa-XVIIIa in FIG. 17 (a).

  FIG. 107A shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the upward position, and FIG. 107B illustrates a state in which the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position. 107 (a) and 107 (b) show a state where the torsion spring SP2 and the lower cover member 345 (see FIG. 81) are removed, and in FIG. In contrast, FIG. 107B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated forward, and FIG. 107B shows a state in which the swing operation member 13310 has been rotated backward relative to the lever member 22340. The In FIGS. 107A and 107B, the torsion spring SP1 and the guide support hole 331e1 are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 107, the operation device 22300 includes a lever member 22340 that is pivotally supported by the lever support shaft 331d1, while pivotally supporting the swing operation member 13310 at one end (left side in FIG. 107 (b)). A wall member 22322b having an arc wall portion 22322b2 that is always meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340, and a swinging member 22360 having a meshing plate portion 22362c that is always meshed with the rotation gear 22347 of the lever member 22340. Prepare mainly.

  The lever member 22340 is configured in such a manner that a rotation gear 22347 pivotally supported by the angle regulating rod member 346 is added to the lever member 13340 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The wall member 22322b is a plate member that is fitted into the fitting recess 13322a (see FIG. 78), and extends in the direction approaching the lever support shaft 331d1, and the inwardly extending portion thereof. An arc wall portion 22322b2 having a gear tooth extending from an inner end of the 22322b1 (right side in FIG. 107 (a)) along an arc centering on the lever support shaft 331d1 and meshing with the rotary gear 22347. And comprising.

  The swinging member 22360 is a motor fixing plate having a toothed plate portion 22362c in which gear teeth that mesh with the rotating gear 22347 are formed on the motor fixing plate 362 (see FIG. 81) of the swinging member 360 in the thirteenth embodiment. It is configured in a manner exchanged with 22362.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, when the lever member 22340 is rotated, the rotation gear 22347 is rotated with respect to the arc wall portion 22322b2, and the motor fixing plate 22362 is pivotally supported along with the rotation of the rotation gear 22347. It is rotated around the rod 363. Therefore, the rotation of the swing operation member 13310 can be continued while the lever member 22340 is rotating.

  In the present embodiment, the lever member 22340 is rotated 34 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 107A to the state shown in FIG. 107B, and the swing operation member 13310 is rotated 10 degrees during that time. That is, the gear ratio of the intergrated plate portion 22362c to the gear teeth formed on the arc wall portion 22322b2 is about 0.3 (= 10/34).

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main body member 341 of the lever member 340 is fixed in shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be partially extensible in the longitudinal direction. In this case, the main body member 341 is contracted so that the swing operation member 310 can be accommodated rearward, so that the swing operation member 310 is disposed in a downward position and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10, so that the packaging box When protruding from the top, the front / rear width of the swing operation member 310 can be reduced to a size that fits into the packing box.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described where the gear damper 6347 generates viscous resistance only when the peeling member 6350 is peeled off from the lever member 6340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the gear damper may generate a viscous resistance only when the lever member 6340 and the peeling member 6350 are fixed by suction. In this case, resistance corresponding to the operation speed when the player operates the swing operation member 310 can be returned to the player, and the operational feeling can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350 (when the circumscribed circle of the rotation locus of the eccentric cam member 4333 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350), Although the case where the upper end of the lock member 4336 and the lower end part of the lock receiving member 4350 are in contact with each other has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lock receiving member 4350 may be controlled to swing at the upper end of the lock member 4336 at a position spaced upward from the eccentric cam member 4333.

  In this case, when the lock receiving member 4350 is swung by the rotational drive of the eccentric cam member 4333, the lock receiving member 4350 is not restricted by the lock member 4336, and therefore the eccentric cam member 4333 is rotationally driven in one direction. By doing so, it is possible to perform a turning operation that causes the swing operation member 310 to reciprocate up and down.

  Further, for example, when the intermediate portion between the longest diameter portion of the eccentric cam member 4333 and the eccentric cam shaft 331d2 is in contact with the lock receiving member 4350, the lock receiving member 4350 is restricted from swinging by the lock member 4336. But it ’s okay.

  In this case, by rotating the eccentric cam member 4333 in one direction, the lock receiving member 4350 can be reciprocated up and down above the upper end of the lock member 4336, and a turning operation can be performed. In addition, even if the player performs an erroneous operation of lifting the swing operation member 310 upward during the turning operation, the lock member 4350 can regulate the swing of the lock receiving member 4350, and the eccentric cam member 4333 It can be prevented from being damaged.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, the lock member 8336 enters the lower side of the lever member 340 and restricts the swinging of the lever member 340. It is not limited to this. For example, a rod-shaped member that expands and contracts is disposed from the side wall of the inner case member 8330 toward the inner side of the inner case member 8330, and the rod-shaped member is expanded when the lever member 340 and the slide plate 8370 are separated from each other, You may make it enter into the lower side of the rear-end part of the lever member 340. FIG.

  In this case, the shape of the hook-shaped tip portion of the lock member 8336 does not need to be a shape that enters the lower side of the lever member 340, so that the degree of freedom in designing the lock member 8336 can be improved.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the lock member 8336 is disposed on the fixed side in a state where the lever member 340 is in the middle of the swing angle range, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lock member 8336 may be disposed on the fixed side when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the uppermost position in the swing angle range.

  In this case, even if the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350, the range in which the lever member 340 can swing is limited on the upper side of the peeling member 350 whose swing is restricted. Thus, the momentum in the swinging direction applied to the lever member 340 is suppressed (the lever member 340 cannot be moved to the extent that momentum is applied). Therefore, the lever member 340 can be prevented from violently colliding with the inner case member 8330 and damaging the inner case member 8330.

  Further, for example, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the lock member 8336 may be disposed on the fixed side. In this case, in a posture in which the lever member 340 is restricted from swinging, the distance between the rear end portion of the lever member 340 and the upper side surface of the inner case member 8330 can be increased, so that the lever member 340 is peeled off from the peeling member 350. The player notices that the feeling transmitted to the player changes (the weight of the peeling member 350 is not transmitted to the player and the swing operation member 310 feels heavy), and the player swings the swing operation member. It is possible to have a time allowance for reducing the load applied to 310.

  On the other hand, when the rear end portion of the lever member 340 is disposed at the lowest position in the swing angle range, the peeling member 350 and the eccentric cam member 333 come into contact with each other, so that a load is applied from the peeling member 350 to the eccentric cam member 333. May occur. Therefore, in order to prevent this, the lock member 8336 is fixed on the fixed side only when the lock member 8336 is arranged at information rather than the middle position of the swinging range (when the eccentric cam member 333 does not contact the peeling member 350). You may make it arrange | position to.

  In the ninth embodiment, the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 are formed with the same length, and the elastic coefficient of the upper elastic connecting member CS91 is larger than that of the lower elastic connecting member CS92. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the elastic coupling members CS91 and CS92 may have the same elastic coefficient, and the upper elastic coupling member CS91 may be shorter than the lower elastic coupling member CS92.

  In this case, in the state where the elastic connecting members CS91 and CS92 have the same length (stretched), the upper elastic connecting member CS91 has a larger elastic displacement and a larger elastic recovery force, so that it has recovered elastically. In a later state, the lens member 317 of the swing operation member 310 can be easily held upward. Thereby, it can be made easy for the player to push in the lens member 317 from above.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the flange member 13312c is formed from a hard resin has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shape of the collar member 13312c may be maintained at room temperature, and may be formed from a shape memory material whose shape changes in a mode in which the engagement with the support member 13312b is released by heating. In this case, the flange member 13312c can be replaced without removing the back side frame member 13311 from the intermediate base M13.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the protective cover 13316 is formed from a hard resin, and the rear side frame member 13311 needs to be removed from the intermediate base M13 in order to remove the protective cover 13316. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the protective cover 13316 may be formed from a soft resin material. In this case, by deforming the shape of the protective cover 13316, the protective cover 13316 can be removed even while the back frame member 13311 is fixed to the intermediate base M13.

  Although the case where the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1 of the wall member 17322b is uniform has been described in the seventeenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a first region having a large friction coefficient and a second region having a friction coefficient smaller than that of the first region may be formed on the surface state of the extending portion 17322b1. In this case, the friction arm portion 17362c gives the operational feeling (rotation resistance, weight) given to the player who swings the swing operation member 13310 while the friction arm portion 17362c and the extending portion 17322b1 are rubbing. It can be changed between the case of rubbing with the region and the case of rubbing the friction arm portion 17362c with the second region.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the rotary lever 19337b is brought into contact with the lever member 19340 in a state where the swing operation member 13310 is disposed in the downward position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rotation lever 19337b may be in contact with the lever member 19340 while the swing operation member 13310 is moving downward (while the lever member 19340 is moving). In this case, the effect of decelerating the lever member 19340 can be achieved by operating and contacting the rotary lever 19337b in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the lever member 19340.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<An example of the technical idea that the lever member 340 is bent when locked>
A gaming machine comprising: a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation; and a regulating member that regulates movement of the moving member. An operating member to be operated, and a regulated member connected to the operating member and capable of regulating movement by the regulating member, wherein the regulated member is restricted from moving by the regulating member, The gaming machine A1 is configured such that the shape of the moving member is deformable when a load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operating member.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movement member that moves between a first position and a second position when a player manually operates is restricted in movement at a predetermined position by a restriction member (for example, JP, 2014-144218, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the player applies an overload to the moving member in a state where movement is restricted, there is a possibility that the regulating member may be loaded through the moving member and the regulating member may be damaged. was there.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the moving member includes an operating member that is operated by the player and a controlled member that is connected to the operating member and whose movement can be controlled by the regulating member. In a state where the member is restricted from moving by the restricting member, when the load of a predetermined amount or more acts on the operation member, the shape of the moving member can be deformed, so that the load is consumed for the shape deformation of the moving member. Thereby, the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged when the player applies an overload to the moving member.

  In addition, as a structure of the moving member which implement | achieves the deformation | transformation of the shape of the moving member by the load of load, for example, the structure which arrange | positions elastic members, such as a spring, in a part of moving member, or a moving member is comprised from several site | part A configuration in which each part is adsorbed by magnetic force is exemplified.

  In an arrangement in which an elastic member such as a spring is arranged in a part of the moving member, the degree of deformation of the moving member changes in proportion to the load applied, so an overload is applied to the operation member from the player. The greater the degree of deformation, the greater the degree of deformation of the moving member. Therefore, as the player overloads the operation member, the load consumed by the elastic member can be increased, and the load transmitted to the regulating member can be reduced accordingly.

  In a configuration in which the moving member is composed of a plurality of parts and each member is adsorbed by magnetic force, the moving member maintains its shape until a load greater than the adsorption force is applied, and the movable member is not applied until a load greater than the adsorption force is applied. The shape of is deformed. Thereby, when operating normally with the load below adsorption | suction force, a moving member can be handled as a rigid body and operation of a moving member can be made easy.

  In the gaming machine A1, the moving member has a predetermined amount or more of the operating member in a fixed state where the operating member is fixed to the restricted member and a state where the restricted member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. The gaming machine A2 is configured such that at least the operation member can be moved relative to the regulated member by being loaded with a load of.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the moving member is operated in a fixed state where the operating member is fixed to the restricted member and in a state where the restricted member is restricted from moving by the restricting member. When a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied to the member, it is possible to configure at least a non-transmission state in which the operation member can be moved relative to the regulated member. In the non-transmission state, the transmission of the load to the regulating member can be suppressed while securing the property.

  The gaming machines A1 and A2 include a support member that supports the moving member, and the operation member and the regulated member that constitute the moving member are coaxially supported by a first shaft that is disposed on the support member. The game machine A3 is characterized in that the movement of the moving member is swinging about the first axis.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 and 2, by operating the operation member, it can be suppressed that a large load is applied between the regulating member and the regulated member. It is possible to prevent the restricting member from being damaged.

  The gaming machine A3 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a swinging direction, and the urging force is applied to the operation member side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A3, the biasing force of the first biasing member is applied to the operation member side and not to the regulated member side. It is possible to prevent the biasing force from being applied. Thereby, when a moving member will be in a non-transmission state, it can prevent that a control member receives the excessive biasing force from a 1st biasing member, and is damaged.

  Here, when excessive urging force is generated, the spring member is arranged in a manner to connect the operation member and the regulated member, and the spring member does not expand and contract in the fixed state, but the operation member in the non-transmission state The case where the spring member between the member and the regulated member is expanded and contracted to generate an urging force is illustrated. In this case, since the amount of change in the distance between the operation member and the regulated member becomes large, an excessive urging force may be generated from the regulated member to the regulating member.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the lateral direction in the longitudinal direction, and the biasing force of the first biasing member is generated in a direction in which the operation member is tilted forward, and the fixed state The non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state in which the moving member is controlled to swing by the restricting member.

  Here, when the biasing direction of the first biasing member is set to a direction in which the moving member rises, when the player overloads the operating member downward, the operating member peels from the regulated member and is regulated. Even if the member can be prevented from being damaged, the operation member rises as soon as the player releases his / her hand, so he / she does not realize that the player is overloading and may repeatedly overload the operation member. There was a problem that there was.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A4, the direction of biasing of the operating member by the first biasing member is directed to the direction in which the operating member is tilted forward. Can continue to be placed in position. Thereby, the situation where a player repeatedly applies an overload to the operation member can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine A4, the first shaft is disposed in the lateral direction in the longitudinal direction, and the urging force of the first urging member is directed in a direction to raise the operation member, and the movement in the fixed state The gaming machine A6, wherein the non-transmission state is configured by applying a downward load to the operation member in a state in which the member is restricted from swinging by the restriction member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A4, the non-transmission state is configured by directing the operation member upward and applying a downward load to the operation member. Even if a downward load is applied to the moving member and the moving member constitutes a non-transmitting state, when the player releases the load, the operating member moves to the fixed state side by the biasing force. Thereby, arrangement | positioning of an operation member can be stabilized and it can make it easy for a player to perform next operation.

  In the gaming machine A6, a gaming machine A7 provided with a braking means for reducing the swing speed of the operation member when the moving member returns from the non-transmission state to the fixed state.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A6, the swing speed of the operating member when returning from the non-transmission state to the fixed state is reduced, so that the operating member can return to the fixed state at high speed. Thus, it is possible to suppress the impact from being transmitted to the regulating member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the braking means is a gear damper disposed on the support member and capable of generating viscous resistance, and a gear portion disposed on the operation member meshes with the gear damper. Game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the braking means is constituted by a gear damper capable of generating viscous resistance. Therefore, the greater the swing speed of the operating member, the greater the resistance applied to the operating member. . Therefore, resistance when the swing speed is low (the return speed of the operation member is low) is suppressed. For example, when the moving member is in a non-transmitting state, the player operates the operation member to swing the operation member at high speed. The resistance when doing so can be increased.

  As a result, the urging force of the first urging member can be set smaller and the design of the first urging member can be freely set as compared with the case where a large resistance corresponding to the high speed operation of the player is generated regardless of the swing speed. The degree can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A8, the gear damper is arranged in such a manner that a viscous resistance is generated in relative movement of the operation member and the regulated member.

  Here, when the operating member and the regulated member are fixed and swinging as a unit, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member does not change, so that the operating member does not receive viscous resistance from the gear damper.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, in the non-transmission state, when the operating member swings, the relative positional relationship between the operating member and the regulated member changes. Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper is given to the operation member.

  Therefore, the viscous resistance of the gear damper can be applied to the operation member only when the player applies a load to the operation member so that the regulated member and the operation member constitute a non-transmission state. Accordingly, it is possible to change the feeling of operation when the player operates the operation member, and to prompt the player to use the operation member appropriately.

  For example, when the operation resistance when operating the operation member becomes excessively large, it becomes difficult for the player to perform the operation, resulting in stress. If the operating member and the regulated member are returned to the fixed state, the operating resistance is reduced, and the player can easily operate.

  Therefore, the player who tries to avoid stress avoids overloading the operation member. Thereby, it can suppress that a moving member is destroyed.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, comprising: a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member; and a transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the transmission member is disposed at a position where the load is not transmitted when changing from the fixed state to the non-transmission state.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, even if the moving member receives a load and changes from the fixed state to the non-transmitting state, the load is not transmitted to the transmitting member. The damage of the transmission member can be suppressed, and the durability of the transmission member can be improved.

  As a position where the load is not transmitted from the moving member, when the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load, a position opposite to the direction in which the moving member moves or the moving member moves in the direction to receive the load. In this case, a position in the direction in which the moving member moves and a position separated by a predetermined distance from the moving member are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A10, when the moving member is in the non-transmitting state and a driving force is generated from the driving device, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member and is not transmitted to the regulated member. A gaming machine A11 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A10, even when the driving member generates a driving force when the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the regulating member, the driving force generated at that time is the operating member. Since it is used for swinging and not used for swinging the regulated member, it is possible to prevent the regulating member from being damaged.

  In the gaming machines A2 to A11, when the moving member is in the fixed state and the moving member is disposed at the second position as compared to the case where the moving member is disposed at the first position, the operation member The movement member is restricted from moving by the restriction member when the movement member is arranged at the second position, and the operation member and the restricted member are attracted by an electromagnet. The gaming machine A12 is configured such that the fixed state is configured.

  Here, when the swinging of the operation member at the first position is restricted, the projecting width of the operation member to the outside is smaller. For example, when selecting a box for packing a gaming machine, the operation member at the first position is selected. The box can be made smaller if it is selected based on the fixed state.

  On the other hand, if the power is turned off in a state where the swing of the operation member is restricted at the second position, the operation member cannot be moved from the second position, and the gaming machine cannot be put in the packing box. There was a problem.

  Also, if the line width is determined by the width of the state in which the operation member is arranged at the first position in a factory inspection line or the like, the operation member is erroneously arranged at the second position and the swing is fixed. There is a problem that the operation member may collide with an inspection machine or the like by flowing through the line.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, even if the movement member is restricted at the second position where the operation member projects, the operation member and the regulated member are Since it is fixed with an electromagnet, the operation member and the regulated member can be unfixed by turning off the power. Thereby, an operation member can be easily arrange | positioned in a 1st position, and a game machine can be accommodated in the box for packing, and the test | inspection in an improved test | inspection line can be made easy.

<An example of the technical idea that the eccentric cam can be separated from the lever>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, a driving device that generates a driving force that moves the moving member, and a driving force that is generated from the driving device. A game machine comprising: a transmission member for transmitting to the game, wherein the movement member moves in a direction away from the transmission member when the movement member is operated in one direction. Machine B1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is driven by gear engagement (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-2014). (See -144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, if the moving member is manually operated while the moving member is being driven, the load on the gear is increased, the durability of the driving device and the transmission member is reduced, or the moving member is moved by driving. There was a problem that there was a risk of giving a load to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, when the player operates the moving member in one direction, the moving member moves in a direction away from the transmission member, so a load is applied from the moving member to the driving device and the transmission member. Can be suppressed. Moreover, it can suppress that a moving member gives a load to a player by drive. Note that examples of the transmission member include an eccentric cam and a solenoid.

  In the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is constituted by a member that is eccentrically supported by a first shaft and is rotated about the first shaft.

  Here, when the moving member is operated in one direction, the moving member and the transmission member are separated from each other. Therefore, when the moving member is operated in the other direction, the moving member and the transmission member collide with each other. In many cases, the arm length of the transmission member increases as the movement width of the movement member increases. In this case, the transmission member may be damaged by the collision.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the transmission member is composed of an eccentric cam. Therefore, when the moving member is driven at a portion where the distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is long. While colliding with the moving member while ensuring the amount of movement, the moving member and the transmission member collide from the first shaft by taking a posture in which a portion with a short distance from the first shaft to the outer shape is directed to the moving member. It is possible to shorten the arm length of the transmission member of the portion to be performed. Thereby, it can prevent that a transmission member is damaged.

  The gaming machine B2 includes a first urging member that generates an urging force that moves the moving member in a specific direction, and the specific direction is a direction in which the moving member and the transmission member are brought close to each other. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the moving member is pressed against the transmission member by the urging force of the first urging member, so that the movement is achieved by rotating the transmission member about the first axis. The member can be reciprocated. As a result, the player's attention can be easily collected on the moving member.

  In the gaming machine B3, the moving member is pivotally supported by a second axis that is different from the first axis and extends in the left-right direction, and the moving member is operated by a player. A gaming machine B4 comprising a member, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft and on the lower side of the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the transmission member can be moved under the moving member while the second shaft extends in the left-right direction and the lever can swing in the forward tilting direction. Since it is disposed on the side and on the opposite side of the operation member across the second shaft, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the transmission member when the player pushes down the operation member. Thereby, durability of a transmission member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 is characterized in that a production member for producing an effect for the player is disposed on the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the operation member is provided with the production member that produces an effect for the player, so that the player's attention can be gathered on the operation member.

  In addition, as a production | presentation apparatus which produces the effect with respect to a player, light-emitting devices, such as LED arrange | positioned at the board | substrate, the vibration apparatus etc. which produce a vibration are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and a load applied to the operation member when the vibration device vibrates is directed in a direction in which the moving member is separated from the transmission member. A gaming machine B6 characterized by that.

  Here, when the effect device is disposed on the operation member, the weight on the operation member side of the moving member becomes heavy, and thus the urging force of the first urging member is required to be large. Therefore, the load applied to the transmission member may be increased.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the effect member includes at least a vibration device that generates vibration, and the load applied to the operation member when the vibration device vibrates is the moving member. Is directed away from the transmission member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member due to the vibration of the vibration device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B6, the operation member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member, and the vibration unit that vibrates by the vibration device is disposed outside the operation member. A gaming machine B7, which is connected as a shell and a rigid body.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B6, the operation member is configured in a spherical shape with a hollow inside, and the vibration device is disposed at a substantially central portion of the operation member. The size of the vibration device can be ensured while keeping it small. In addition, the vibration unit that vibrates by the vibration device is not concealed inside the operation member, but is connected to the outer shell of the operation member as a rigid body, so that vibration is directly applied to the finger of the player who operates the operation member. I can tell you. Therefore, the effect of the vibration device can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and a direction axis into which the pushing member is pushed is the same as that of the first shaft across the second shaft. A gaming machine B8, which is arranged on the opposite side.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the operation member includes a pushing member that enables a pushing operation downward, and the direction axis into which the pushing member is pushed is the second. Since it is arranged on the opposite side of the first shaft across the shaft, when the player pushes the pushing member, the load is applied in a direction away from the transmission member and applied to the transmission member from the moving member Can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B8, a gaming machine B9 comprising a pushable state in which the pusher member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pusher member is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B8, a pushable state in which the pusher member can be pushed in and a pushable state in which the pusher member is fixed so that it cannot be displaced and cannot be pushed in are configured. The effect that the moving member receives by the operation performed by the person can be switched on the gaming machine side.

  For example, when a player repeatedly pushes the pushing member intermittently (repetitively hits), when the pushing member returns from the pushed-in state, the reaction member receives a load in the direction of approaching the transmission member. Therefore, the transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, when the push-in is disabled, the entire operation member is pushed down in response to the player's push-in operation, so that the moving member is also moved away from the transmission member. Therefore, even if the player strikes the pushing member repeatedly, it is possible to suppress a situation where the transmission member and the moving member collide due to the operation member returning upward by the biasing force.

  In addition, as a method of configuring the incompressible state, the indentation member is extended to the end position by a method of locking the indentation member with a hook-shaped claw or a vibration device such as a voice coil motor that performs linear reciprocating motion. Examples thereof include a method of continuing to apply a load in one direction. According to the method in which the pushing member is extended to the end position by the vibration device such as a voice coil motor, both the effects of vibrating the pushing member by the vibration device and making the pushing member incapable of being pushed in are produced. Can be made.

  In any one of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the first shaft and the second shaft are arranged in parallel, and the rotation direction of the transmission member is the side away from the first shaft across the second shaft. A gaming machine B10, characterized in that the direction is opposite to the moving member.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B4 to B9, the rotation direction of the transmission member is set to the direction facing the moving member on the side far from the first axis across the second axis. Therefore, when the transmission member moves to face the moving member, the load applied from the moving member to the transmission member is suppressed (the distance from the second shaft to the contact position between the moving member and the transmission member is long). Therefore, even if the transmission member moves in a direction close to the moving member, the possibility that the transmission member is damaged can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the transmission member is pivotally supported by a first shaft, and a rotational gear to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving device, an eccentric shaft that is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the movement An eccentric cam abutting on the member, and a fixed state in which the rotating gear is fixed to the eccentric cam and a non-transmission state in which the rotating gear is relatively movable with respect to the eccentric cam A gaming machine B11 characterized by being enabled.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, in the fixed state, the moving member can be swung by the rotation of the transmission member, and the eccentric cam exceeds the threshold value from the moving member. When receiving a load, the load applied to the eccentric cam from the moving member can be released by setting the eccentric cam and the rotating gear to the non-transmitting state. Thereby, it can prevent that an eccentric cam breaks.

  Note that the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear can be configured to be in a non-transmitting state includes, for example, the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are attracted and fixed by magnetic force, or the case where the eccentric cam and the rotating gear are in the circumferential direction. The case where it fits by friction etc. is illustrated.

<An example of the technical idea that the locking member for fixing the moving member is operated in synchronization with the moving member>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position by a player's operation, a driving device that generates a driving force for driving the moving member, and a shaft that is eccentrically supported by the first shaft A gaming machine comprising: a transmission member that transmits a driving force of the driving device to the moving member; and a restricting member that restricts swinging of the moving member, wherein the restricting member swings the moving member. It is possible to configure a controllable standby state and a release state of canceling the swing control of the moving member, and the transmission member and the control member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. A gaming machine C1 characterized by this.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player is swung by an eccentric cam-shaped transmission member that is driven by a driving device, The biasing force that moves the moving member in the direction approaching the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is received, and the swinging of the moving member is restricted during the swinging of the moving member and at the predetermined timing. There is a gaming machine provided with a regulating member to be released (for example, see JP 2013-244108 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in accordance with the release of the swing restriction of the moving member, the short diameter side of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member is directed to the side in contact with the moving member, so that the moving member Although it is possible to prevent the transmission member from being damaged when it collides with the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member, if the regulating member malfunctions for some reason, the posture of the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member cannot be changed. There is a problem in that the cam-shaped transmission member collides with the moving member on the longer diameter side, and the eccentric cam-shaped transmission member may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member that transmits the driving force to the moving member and the restriction member that restricts the swing of the moving member operate in synchronization with the driving force of the driving device. It is possible to mechanically determine the attitude of the transmission member when is set to the released state. Thereby, since a moving member and a transmission member can be contact | abutted in the state which orient | assigned the strength side (short diameter side) of the transmission member to the moving member, durability of a transmission member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine C1, the restriction member is operated in synchronization with the transmission member only in a phase for releasing the restriction of swinging of the moving member, and when the synchronization operation with the transmission member is released, the restriction member is The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the member is in the standby state, and the swinging of the moving member is restricted by the restricting member when the moving member moves to a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, after the regulating member releases the regulation of the swinging of the moving member, the driving force of the driving device can be used exclusively for the swinging of the moving member. Therefore, when the transmission member is rotated, it is possible to prevent problems such as collision with the moving member due to the movement of the regulating member together.

  In addition, even when the player operates the moving member during synchronous driving, the moving member can be restricted by the restricting member by arranging the moving member at a predetermined position. Synchronous drive with the member (releasing the swinging restriction of the moving member) can be performed.

  In the gaming machine C2, when the restriction member is in the standby state, the movement of the movement member is restricted by moving the restriction member so that one end of the movement member rides on the restriction member. The moving member can execute a first operation that does not pass through the predetermined position and a second operation that reaches the predetermined position, depending on a movement mode of the transmission member, and the restricting member includes A gaming machine C3 comprising a recessed portion that is recessed from the swinging locus of the outer shape portion of the moving member when performing the first operation.

  When the swinging direction of the moving member is regulated by moving the regulating member in such a manner that one end of the moving member rides on the regulating member, the moving member is regulated as a step before giving the regulation of the swinging direction to the moving member. Resistance is applied from the member. On the other hand, if resistance is applied from the restricting member even during an operation that is not intended to be restricted in the swinging direction as in the first operation, an extra driving force of the moving member is required.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, when the moving member performs the first operation, the recessed portion is retracted from the moving member and is thus recessed. It is possible to prevent resistance from being applied to the moving member. Thereby, the load applied to the transmission member can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the game machine includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. An eccentric cam, and when the restriction of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released and the moving member is moved toward the transmitting member by a biasing force, The first side surface, which is the side surface in contact with the moving member, is configured to come into contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft, and the moving member is the cylindrical portion. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the first side surface is retracted from the moving member when starting to come into contact with the gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the restriction of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, and the moving member moves toward the transmission member with the urging force In the cam portion of the transmission member, the first side surface, which is the side surface of the transmission member that is in contact with the moving member, is configured to come into contact with the cylindrical portion that is a part of the transmission member that is pivotally supported by the first shaft. When the moving member starts to come into contact with the cylindrical portion, the first side surface is retracted from the moving member, so that the swinging displacement of the moving member can be ensured to the maximum. Accordingly, it is possible to configure a synchronized state in which the swinging displacement of the moving member is ensured to the maximum immediately after the restriction of the swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released.

  In the gaming machine C4, the gaming machine C5 is characterized in that an end of the first side surface opposite to the cylindrical portion comes into contact with the moving member and the transmitting member from the beginning.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member can be improved.

  Here, when the moving member hits the long diameter portion of the circular eccentric cam from the rotational direction of the eccentric cam, the moment applied to the eccentric cam increases, and the load in the rotational direction applied to the drive device increases. Therefore, when it is not known when the transmission member collides with the moving member, it is preferable that the large diameter portion does not contact the moving member in the rotation direction of the transmission member (circular eccentric cam). On the other hand, if it is possible to grasp when the moving member hits the transmission member, it is possible to increase the swinging speed of the moving member by swinging the moving member at the large outer diameter portion, so that the effect is enhanced. be able to.

  In the case of synchronous driving, the timing when the moving member collides with the transmission member can be mechanically matched. Therefore, when the moving member comes into contact with the transmission member, the first side surface is slightly retracted, and the first side surface can be brought into contact with the moving member at the timing after the collision, thereby improving the speed of the swinging motion of the moving member. Can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the game machine includes a first urging device that generates an urging force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member, and the transmission member rotates about the first axis. When the restriction of swinging of the moving member by the restricting member is released, the transmission member abuts on the moving member, and the moving member follows the rotation of the transmitting member. A gaming machine C6 that is swung.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the gaming machine C6 includes a first biasing device that generates a biasing force that swings the moving member in a direction close to the transmission member. The eccentric cam is configured to rotate about the first axis, and when the restriction of the swing of the moving member by the restriction member is released, the transmission member abuts on the movement member and follows the rotation of the transmission member to move the movement member. Since the member swings, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the timing at which the swing restriction of the moving member is released. As a result, the player can easily concentrate on the game.

<An example of the technical idea that the operation unit arranged at the tip of the moving member vibrates>
A moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player, and a vibration device that is disposed on the moving member and is capable of generating vibrations. And the longitudinal direction of the moving member are inclined with respect to each other.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a moving member that moves between a first position and a second position when operated by a player includes a vibration device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-20741). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that it is difficult to increase the vibration in order to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction such as shaking of the gaming machine due to the vibration of the vibration device being transmitted to the gaming machine. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the longitudinal direction of the moving member and the vibration direction of the vibration device disposed on the moving member are inclined, the vibration generated by the vibration device is It can be decomposed into a direction component along the direction and a direction component along the direction perpendicular to the direction component, and vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Examples of the vibration device include a voice coil motor that forms a vibration in a linear direction, and a vibrator that generates vibration by rotating an eccentric weight. In the case of a voice coil motor, the direction of vibration means the direction in which the voice coil motor reciprocates, and in the case of a vibrator, the direction of vibration means a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the weight.

  The gaming machine D1 includes a driving device that generates a driving force that swings the moving member, and a transmission member that transmits the driving force generated by the driving device to the moving member. A gaming machine D2 comprising a device that generates vibration, wherein the transmission member is disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the moving member is moved by the vibration of the vibration device.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the reaction that occurs when the vibration device operates is directed in the direction of moving the moving member away from the transmission member, so that the moving member is transmitted by the vibration of the vibration device. It can be swung in a direction away from the member. Thereby, it can suppress that a transmission member receives load by the vibration of a vibration apparatus.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device includes a device that generates a vibration in a linear direction, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and vibration of the vibration device is generated. A gaming machine D3, wherein a central axis is disposed in a manner passing through the second axis, and a buffer member that absorbs vibration is disposed on the second axis.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by the second shaft disposed on the moving member, and the vibration device is configured by a device that generates vibration in a linear direction. The center axis of vibration of the vibration device is arranged in a manner that passes through the second axis, and the buffer member is disposed on the second axis, so that the shock of vibration can be mitigated by the buffer member. Thereby, the vibration transmitted to a moving member can be suppressed and the vibration transmitted to a game machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by a player, and is configured to increase the rotational resistance of the second shaft by pushing the pushing member. Machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D3, the moving member includes a pushing member that is pushed by the player, and the pushing resistance of the pushing member increases the rotational resistance of the second shaft. Since it is comprised, especially when a player pushes in a pushing member, rotation operation | movement of a vibration apparatus can be suppressed and a vibration component can be ensured largely. Thereby, the state in which the vibration device can easily rotate around the second axis and the state in which the vibration device ensures a large vibration component can be switched by the player's operation.

  In the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the push-in member as a rigid body.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the vibration device is connected to the push member as a rigid body, so that the player can experience the vibration of the vibration device through the push member. Therefore, when the pushing member is not pushed in, the vibrating device is vibrated and swung around the second axis to attract the player's attention to the vibrating device. On the other hand, when the pushing member is pushed in, the vibrating device is swung. By suppressing this, the vibration in the linear direction felt by the player can be increased. Therefore, the behavior of the vibration device can be changed according to the situation (whether or not the player is pushing the pushing member).

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the vibration device is pivotally supported by a second shaft disposed on the moving member, and a vibration central axis of the vibration device is disposed in a manner passing through a position separated from the second shaft. A gaming machine D6 characterized by being played.

  When the connection between the moving member and the vibration device is an axial support, the vibration transmitted to the player can be increased by matching the center axis of the vibration of the vibration device with the axial support position. On the other hand, in this case, a large vibration is also transmitted to the gaming machine. For this reason, there has been a problem in that the fastening screw is loosened or the member is deteriorated at an early stage, and the maintenance cycle is shortened.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, vibration is caused by rotating the vibration device by shifting the rotation shaft of the vibration device and the center axis of vibration of the vibration device. The vibration of the device can be used, and the vibration transmitted to the gaming machine can be reduced (vibration energy is used for rotation of the vibration device). In addition, the presentation effect can be improved by swinging the vibration device by the vibration of the vibration device.

  The gaming machine D6 includes a detection device that detects the vibration of the vibration device, and the vibration device is disposed on an operation member held by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D6, the vibration device is disposed on the operation member held by the player and includes a detection device that detects the vibration of the vibration device. By grasping the operating member while being held, vibration can be suppressed and a signal detected by the vibration device can be changed. Thereby, it can be detected whether the player is holding the operation member (in a preparation stage for operating the moving member).

<An example of a technical idea that assists the input timing of a moving member that performs turning>
A gaming machine E1 comprising an input device for a player to perform an input operation, the input device being driven in a direction approaching or moving away from the player and an input unit for performing an input operation.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a timing for operating an input device is specified (see, for example, JP 2012-210238 A). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has a problem that it becomes difficult to concentrate on the game, such as being distracted by the timing of operating the input device and neglecting the adjustment of the strength of playing the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the input unit of the input device is driven in a direction approaching and separating from the player, the input unit moves in a direction approaching the player, and the player's finger If it touches, the operation of the input unit can be performed on the gaming machine side by operating the input unit in a manner to push it back.

  Examples of the input operation include an operation of pushing a push button and an operation of pulling the moving member.

  In the gaming machine E1, the input device includes a vibration device that vibrates in a linear direction, and is arranged in a manner in which a vibration direction of the vibration device coincides with a direction in which the input unit is operated, and the vibration device is the input device. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the input unit is not operable when pressed against a part, and the input unit is operable when the vibration device is retracted from the input part.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, when the vibration device is pressed against the input unit, the input unit is disabled, and when the vibration device is retracted from the input unit, the input is performed. Since the unit can be operated, the vibration device can have both an effect of vibrating the input device and an effect of timing the operation of the input unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device that causes a reaction force to act on the player side when the player operates the input unit is the vibration coefficient when the transmission device transmits vibration to the input unit. A gaming machine E3 that is made smaller than an elastic coefficient of a second urging device that applies a reaction force to the device side.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the elastic coefficient of the first urging device is made smaller than the elastic coefficient of the second urging device, so that the vibration device is separated from the input device. The operation of the input unit can be performed with a small force while ensuring a large speed for returning to the position to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the ease of operation of the input unit while ensuring the magnitude of vibration that the player feels passively.

  In the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device is a member having a size that can be held by a player, and when the player holds the input device, the input unit can be arranged at a palm position. A gaming machine E4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine E2 or E3, the input device including the input unit is formed as a member having a size that can be gripped by the player, and when the player grips the input device, Since the input unit can be arranged at the palm position, the ease of operation of the input unit can be improved. That is, when the input device is held, the palm can be pressed against the input unit by further grasping, and another operation such as changing the input device can be made unnecessary.

  In addition, since the input unit can be hidden with a palm, only the player holding the input unit can grasp the vibration of the input unit. Thereby, notifications such as jackpots can be made in a manner that is not noticed by other players.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is provided with a locking portion for locking fingers on the opposite side of the input portion of the input device.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, when the input device is gripped, the vibration on the input unit side is received by the palm and the finger is hooked on the locking unit, so that the vibration by the vibration device can be obtained. Can be confined inside the palm. Thereby, the vibration which a player feels can be ensured largely.

<An example of the technical idea that the spherical part turns to the player side at the moving lower end>
An operation member configured to be movable having an operation unit operated by a player, and a connection member configured to be movable while connecting the operation member and the gaming machine main body, and by moving the connection member When the posture of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation unit can be formed into a first state and a second state different from the first state, the amount of change in the posture is reduced. A gaming machine F1 comprising correction means for changing the posture of the operation member in a direction.

  There is known a gaming machine that includes an operation member having an operation unit such as a push button, and the posture of the operation member with respect to the player changes between a first state and a second state as the operation member moves (for example, a special feature) (See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, for example, if the posture is easy for the player to operate in the first state, there is a risk that it will be difficult to operate in the second state, and there is a feeling of operation of the operating member in the first state and the second state. Due to the change, there is a problem that the player feels stress and the player may be dissatisfied.

  For example, when the operation member is arranged at a distance from the front side of the player and the operation unit seeks a push-down operation, even if the operation unit can be operated easily, the shaft on which the operation member extends in the left-right direction If the operation unit changes to a mode that requires a push-in operation from the front side by moving along an arc trajectory centered on the center, the space for placing the arm that pushes the operation unit becomes narrow, and the game It is difficult for the player to operate the operation unit, and in the worst case, the player may abandon the operation of the operation unit.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the posture of the operation member viewed from the player who operates the operation member by moving the connection member can be formed in the first state and the second state different from the first state. In this case, since the correction means for changing the posture of the operation member in the direction of reducing the amount of change is provided, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to change the operation feeling on the operation member. Therefore, by being configured to be easy for the player to play in the first state, it is possible to maintain a state in which the player can easily operate even in the second state.

  Note that the correction means includes, for example, a wall member and a contact member disposed on the operation member in a manner capable of contacting the wall member, and is generated when the contact member contacts the wall member. A device that changes the attitude of the operation member by a reaction force, a device that is configured with a gear group that meshes with a gear tooth arranged on the operation member and applies a load in the rotation direction to the gear tooth by moving the connection member, etc. Is exemplified.

  Examples of the movement of the connecting member include rotation around a predetermined rotation axis and sliding movement in a linear direction.

  The gaming machine F1 includes a driving device that drives the connection member, and a change state in which the operation member changes its posture in a movement range of the connection member, and the operation member and the connection member are not changed in posture. The game machine F2 is characterized in that a maintenance state in which the posture is maintained is formed, and a load generated on the operation member from the correction means in the change state is directed to brake the connection member.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1, the operation member does not always change its posture with respect to the connection member, so that the connection member is driven as compared to the case where the connection member constantly changes its posture. The driving force required to cause the connecting member to be suppressed and the load generated on the operating member from the correcting means in the change state is directed to the direction of braking the connecting member. The force that needs to be generated is assisted by the correction means, and the load applied to the drive device can be suppressed.

  For example, when the connecting member and the operating member move in the vertical direction and the connecting member and the operating member are arranged at the lower end of the moving range, the change state is configured, and the lower end of the moving range is given from the correcting means to the operating member. The moving speed of the connecting member and the operating member can be reduced by the load, and when the connecting member and the operating member rise to the vicinity of the upper end of the moving range, the movement resistance of the connecting member and the operating member is suppressed from increasing. The driving force required for driving the connecting member can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a contacted member that comes into contact with the correction unit, and the posture of the operation member changes as the correction unit comes into contact with the contacted member when the operation member moves. Characteristic gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the operating member changes its posture when the correcting means and the contacted member come into contact with each other, so that the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member. The structure of the connection member can be simplified as compared with the case where the member is disposed on the connection member, and the attitude of the operation member is maintained until the correction means reaches the position where the contacted member is disposed. By maintaining the above, it is possible to indicate the timing at which the player operates the operation unit.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the operating member is in the change state, the operating member is given a load in a predetermined direction that is opposite to the direction of the load generated from the correcting means. The gaming machine F4, wherein the correcting means is configured to be capable of changing its posture in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, when the posture changes in the changed state, the direction of the change is opposite to the direction of the posture change, and the direction of the displacement and the direction of the force face each other. Even if a load is applied to the operating member in a predetermined direction that may cause an excessive load, the correcting means is configured to change the posture of the operating member in the predetermined direction, thereby preventing the correcting means from being destroyed. can do.

  In the gaming machine F4, the correcting means includes an elastic member having spring elasticity between the operating member, and the correcting means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, the correcting means is deformed by the spring elasticity of the elastic member provided in the correcting means between the operating member and the repulsive force proportional to the attitude change of the operating member. When a load in a predetermined direction is applied to the operating member, the amount of movement of the operating member can be increased by increasing the force applied to the operating member from the correcting means as the moving amount of the operating member increases. Can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the game machine includes a contacted member with which the correction unit contacts, and the connection member is a lever member that is pivotally supported by the gaming machine main body, and the correction unit is the contacted member A gaming machine F6, wherein the direction of the reaction force received when contacting the member is a direction having a direction component perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member at that time.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the correcting means abuts against the abutted member in a direction along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member. Since the load applied to the member acts along a direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the lever member and the lever member receives a load in the axial radial direction, it is possible to prevent the lever member from vibrating in the moving direction (circumferential direction). (The load applied to the operating member by the correcting means can be prevented from acting in the moving direction of the lever member). Therefore, the posture of the lever member can be stabilized when the operation member comes into contact with the contacted member and changes its posture, and the operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F6, the abutted member projects so as to come into contact with the lever member when a load of a predetermined amount or more is applied from the correcting means.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F6, when a predetermined amount of load is applied to the contacted member through the correcting means by the player's operation, the contacted member is used as a lever member. The lever member can be braked by projecting to the abutting position to suppress the moving speed of the lever member. On the other hand, when the load applied to the operation member from the correcting means is less than a predetermined amount, the lever member Movement resistance can be suppressed. Thereby, coexistence with prevention of destruction of a lever member and lightening operation of a lever member can be aimed at.

<An example of a technical idea that allows the spherical part to be switched at the lower end of the movement>
An operation member having an operation unit operated by a player, a connection member that connects the operation member to the gaming machine main body in a manner that the operation member can be moved by a predetermined width, and a drive device that drives at least the connection member. In a gaming machine in which the operation member can be changed between a first posture and a second posture different from the first posture with the member arranged at a predetermined position, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member. A first operation state in which the operation member is maintained in the first posture in a state in which the connection member is disposed at a predetermined position, and a state in which the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position. The driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member via a transmission member, and the operation member is configured to be switchable between a second operation state in which the operation member is changed from the first posture to the second posture, and First action When in a second operating state, the gaming machine movement width of the operating member, characterized in that it is unchanged G1.

  A gaming machine that includes an operation member and a connection member and drives the operation member relative to the connection member by a drive device that drives the connection member is known (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, even if there are scenes that emphasize operability and scenes that emphasize production effects, there is only one type of movement of the operation member relative to the operation of the connection member. There is room for improvement because it is necessary to select one of the production effects and sacrifice the other.

  For example, when a push button operated by a player is disposed on the operation member, it is easier for the player to press the push button when the posture of the push button as viewed from the player is constant, while the operation member Since the movement of itself becomes small, it is difficult to perform a large effect using the movement of the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in a state where the operation member is maintained in the first posture in a state where the connection member is disposed at a predetermined position, and in a state where the connection member is disposed at the predetermined position. Since the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member and the operation member is switched from the first posture to the second posture, the operation member can be switched with the movement width of the operation member unchanged. It is possible to achieve both operability and production effects.

  For example, in the case where a push button is provided on the operation member, when the player is requested to operate the push button, the posture of the operation member is changed to the second posture, and the push button is placed in a direction that is easy for the player to operate. On the other hand, when the presentation does not require the player to perform an operation, the operability can be switched to the extraordinary presentation by keeping the position of the operation member in the first position, and the operation member can be operated greatly. . Therefore, it is possible to achieve both improvement in operability and improvement in performance.

  Further, since the movement width of the operation member is not changed between the first operation state and the second operation state, the player is in which operation state the operation member is in until the attitude of the operation member changes at a predetermined position. It is difficult to understand whether the player is playing, so the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, until the player operates the operation unit, the first operation state is set, the operation member is continuously reciprocated with a predetermined width, and the operation member is switched to the second operation state at a predetermined timing to change the posture of the operation member. The player can be informed of the timing of pressing the operation unit, and the operation member itself is in an easy-to-press posture, making the game easy to understand (when to press the push button) and comfortable (push button) Easy to press).

  The gaming machine G1 includes an eccentric cam member that transmits a driving force to the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is configured to be able to transmit a driving force from the driving device to the connection member. A gaming machine G2 comprising a switching means configured to transmit a driving force of a driving device to one of the transmission member and the connection member, and capable of switching to which one.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the operating member or the connecting member through the eccentric cam member in a switchable manner. The driving force generated from the driving device can be suppressed as compared with the case where the two are driven simultaneously.

  As a mode for switching whether the driving force of the driving device is transmitted to the connecting member or the operating member, a gear group connected from the driving device to the operating member and the connecting member by engagement is arranged. A mode in which the gears to be engaged can be switched, or the eccentric cam member can be brought into contact with either the connection member or the transmission member in the middle of rotation, and the distance between the connection member and the operation member is the eccentric cam. The aspect etc. which are made larger than the width of the member are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine G2, when the eccentric cam member abuts on the transmission member in the forwardly rotated state, a driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, and the eccentric cam member is rotated in the reverse direction. The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the driving force is not transmitted to the operation member when the contact member is in contact with the transmission member.

  Here, for example, in a case where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member when the eccentric cam member and the connection member are separated from each other, vibration during operation and the player operating the operation member Therefore, it is necessary to stop the driving device in order to detect that the connecting member is unintentionally separated from the eccentric cam member and prevent the driving force from being erroneously transmitted to the operating member. And the control of the drive device becomes complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, whether or not the driving force is transmitted to the operation member can be switched depending on the rotation direction of the eccentric cam member. Even if the cam member is separated in the middle of the operation, the transmission target of the driving force is not switched as long as the eccentric cam member continues to rotate in a certain direction, so that the driving force may be erroneously transmitted to the operation member. Therefore, the control of the driving device can be made gentle (it is unnecessary to stop the driving device immediately).

  Moreover, since a detection sensor for detecting that the connecting member and the eccentric cam member are separated from each other can be dispensed with, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G3, the eccentric cam member includes a first protruding portion that protrudes along an axis of rotation at an outer diameter portion, and the transmission member can come into contact with the first protruding portion. A second projecting portion that is convexly provided, and has a region in which the second projecting portion moves close to a rotation axis of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated; The gaming machine G4, wherein the second projecting portion is configured to be closer to the rotation shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the second protruding portion has a region that moves closer to the rotation shaft of the eccentric cam member as the eccentric cam member is rotated. In this embodiment, the second projecting portion can be arranged closer to the rotation shaft of the eccentric cam member than the first projecting portion, so that the return of the position of the second projecting portion can be performed by the first projecting portion and the eccentric cam member. This can be done by passing the second projecting portion between the rotation axis of the second projection portion.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the second projecting portion moves to the outside of the locus of the outer diameter portion of the first projecting portion of the eccentric cam member, the first projecting portion is the first projecting portion. 2 The rotation angle of the transmission member from the contact to the protruding portion to the separation can be suppressed, and the angle range in which the load applied to the eccentric cam member increases can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, the first projecting portion is configured as a wall portion that is inclined with respect to a predetermined straight line connecting an outermost diameter portion of the first projecting portion and a rotation axis of the eccentric cam member, The pushing wall surface that is in contact with the second convex portion in a state where the eccentric cam member is rotated by rotation is configured to be inclined so as to become closer to the predetermined straight line as the distance from the predetermined radial line increases. Characteristic gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, when the rotational direction of the eccentric cam member, which is in a state where the driving force is transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member, is forward rotation, Since the pressing wall surface that comes into contact with the predetermined straight line is inclined so as to be closer to the axial radial direction, the eccentric cam member is formed in comparison with the case where the pressing member is configured by a wall surface along the predetermined direction. The amount of movement of the transmission member when rotated by a predetermined angle can be reduced. Therefore, since the transmission efficiency per predetermined time of the driving force transmitted through the transmission member can be reduced, a large load is applied to the eccentric cam member through the transmission member in a short time by operating the operation member. It can suppress being loaded.

  In any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, a locking member that fixes the posture of the connecting member at a predetermined position is provided, and when the locking member is released from fixing the posture of the connecting member, the eccentric cam member rotates backward. On the other hand, the gaming machine G6 is characterized in that when the eccentric cam member rotates in the forward direction, the locking member maintains the fixed posture of the connecting member.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the release of the fixing of the connecting member by the lock member occurs only when the eccentric cam member rotates in the reverse direction. By rotating the eccentric cam member in one direction (the direction of forward rotation) while being arranged in the position, the driving force can be easily transmitted to the operation member via the transmission member while maintaining the posture of the connection member. . Therefore, both the maintenance of the posture of the connecting member by the lock member and the change of the posture of the operating member can be achieved without finely controlling the phase of the eccentric cam member, so that the control of the driving device can be made gradual. it can.

<An example of a technical idea in which the suppressing member is pressed by the reaction force of the elastic force that pushes out the second moving member>
A first moving member configured to be movable, and a first moving member disposed in a state where at least a portion projects outward from the first moving member and movable with respect to the first moving member. Two moving members, and an elastic member disposed on the inner side of the first moving member in the moving direction of the second moving member and having one end connected to the second moving member and having spring elasticity; A suppressing member that is disposed at the other end of the elastic member and suppresses the second moving member from being separated from the first moving member by being pressed against the first moving member by the elastic force of the elastic member; The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that a force of pressing the suppression member against the first moving member is increased by moving a portion of the second moving member that protrudes from the first moving member.

  A gaming machine is known that includes a first moving member and a second moving member that projects outward from the first moving member and is movable with respect to the first moving member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). In such a gaming machine, when the first moving member moves, the second moving member may be damaged by colliding with other members and may need to be replaced. However, if the holding force is insufficient, the second moving member may be detached from the first moving member depending on the magnitude of the load generated at the time of collision with another member.

  In other words, fixing the member that holds the second moving member to the first moving member to the first moving member by fastening with a screw may increase the fixing force compared to the case of fixing by fitting. On the other hand, it takes time to screw a screw during assembly, and a time to remove a screw when removing it for maintenance or the like, resulting in a long working time.

  That is, firmly fixing the second moving member to the first moving member, and shortening the work time for assembling the second moving member to the first moving member and removing the second moving member from the first moving member. There is a problem that it is difficult to achieve both.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine H1, since the portion protruding from the first moving member operates in a direction against the elastic force of the elastic member, the force with which the suppressing member is pressed against the first moving member increases. When the second moving member comes into contact with another member and a large load is applied to the first moving member, the suppression member can be more firmly fixed to the first moving member. Accordingly, by holding the second moving member on the first moving member by the elastic force, the second moving member is also moved when the second moving member comes into contact with another member while shortening the replacement time. It can prevent coming off from the member.

  The gaming machine H1 includes a scissor member that holds the restraining member on the first moving member so that the restraining member cannot move in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the elastic force of the elastic member. The gaming machine H2 is arranged at a part of a position that is movable in a direction in which the first moving member is pressed.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the scissor member is disposed at a part of the position where the restraining member is movable in the direction in which the restraining member is pressed against the first moving member. Before the attachment to the moving member, the space to which the collar member is attached becomes an empty space, so that it becomes easy to arrange the suppression member, and after the attachment of the collar member, the suppression member is moved from the first movement member to the elastic member. Separation in the direction perpendicular to the elastic force can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the flange member is arranged at a part of the position where the flange member is movable in the direction of being pressed against the first moving member of the suppressing member, a force for holding the flange member on the first moving member is generated by the deformation of the elastic member. Therefore, by deforming the elastic member in the reverse direction, the eaves member can be easily detached from the first moving member, and accordingly, the second moving member can be easily detached from the first moving member.

  In the gaming machine H2, the elastic member and the restraining member are disposed inside the first moving member, and the saddle member is attached from the outside to the inside of the first moving member. Machine H3.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the player can suppress unauthorized removal of the elastic member and the restraining member, and the scissors member can be attached from the outside of the first moving member, so that the scissors member When it comes off or forgets to assemble, the hook member can be attached to the first moving member without disassembling the first moving member, and the maintenance time can be shortened.

  Further, since the saddle member is attached from the outside, when the saddle member is detached from the first moving member, it can be configured to drop the saddle member outside the first moving member, and the saddle member falls. You can count on the need for maintenance. That is, the necessity of maintenance can be determined without disassembling the first moving member and looking inside.

  Furthermore, when attaching the eaves member from the inside of the first moving member, the elastic member can be contracted by an amount corresponding to the size of the locking protrusion for engaging the eaves member with the first moving member so that it cannot be pulled out. However, when the hook member is attached from the outside of the first moving member, the locking projection can be arranged on the outer side of the first moving member, and the amount by which the elastic member can be shrunk when the hook member is assembled. Can be suppressed. Thereby, while holding the elastic force of the elastic member large and maintaining the strength to hold the second moving member and the restraining member on the first moving member large (using a hard elastic member), the attachment of the collar member Can be easy.

  In gaming machine H3, gaming machine H4 is characterized in that said saddle member can be removed from said first moving member by displacing said restraining member in a direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by said elastic force.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H3, the restraint member disposed inside the first moving member is displaced in the direction opposite to the direction in which it is pressed by the elastic force, whereby the scissors member is the first. Since it can be removed from the moving member, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally removing the saddle member from the first moving member during the game. In addition, it is possible to suppress unauthorized removal of the eaves member.

  In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the elastic force applied to the second moving member is reduced when the restraining member enters the position where the saddle member is disposed. H5.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H2 to H4, the space where the scissors member is arranged is vacant due to breaking of the scissors member, and the second is caused by the intrusion of the restraining member into the space. Since the elastic force applied to the moving member is reduced, it is possible to improve the buffering action against the load applied to the second moving member after the space arranged by breaking the collar member is freed. The second moving member can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, as a structure of a collar member, what is comprised so that reassembly is possible after a collar member is fractured is illustrated, for example. In this case, a part of the flange member is exposed to the outside of the first moving member while it is broken, so that it can be easily confirmed from the appearance that the flange member is broken.

  In any one of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member is pulled out from the outside of the first moving member, and is in a locked state configured to be undrawn from the outside of the first moving member. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that it can be formed.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines H2 to H5, the second moving member can be formed in a pulled-out state and a locked state, so that the maintenance performance can be improved. It is possible to switch between a state in which the performance of preventing fraud can be improved by not being able to easily remove the second moving member.

  In the gaming machine H6, the unplugged state can be formed by the intrusion of the restraining member inside a space where the saddle member is arranged in a state where the restraining member is held by the saddle member. A gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the unplugged state can be formed by allowing the restraining member to enter the vacant space when the scissor member is removed from the normal position in the assembled state. In a state where the member is disposed at the regular position, it is necessary to disassemble the first moving member in order to remove the second moving member, and it is possible to suppress fraud in which the second moving member is removed.

  Also, when a large load is applied to the eaves member and the eaves member deviates from the normal position, the unplugged state can be formed, and the second moving member can be easily replaced, improving the maintenance performance. Can be made.

<An example of a technical idea for changing the rotational resistance of the spherical portion with respect to the connecting member>
An operation member configured to be operable by a player, and a connection member that movably supports the operation member, and a movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member A gaming machine I1 comprising variable means for making variable.

  A gaming machine including a connection member and an operation member configured to be movable with respect to the connection member is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). In such a gaming machine, when the operation member is operated in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, there is no change in operation feeling (for example, the weight felt by the player), and the player gets bored with the operation of the operation member. There was a problem.

  For example, even if the operation member is rotatably supported by the connection member and the rotation resistance is changed between when the operation member is rotated forward and when the operation member is rotated backward, Since the relationship between the direction of operation and the rotational resistance is always constant, the player is not aware of (discovered) by the operation of rotating the operation member, and the player gets bored with the operation of the operation member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the variable means for changing the movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member is provided, the operation when the operation member is operated in the same direction is provided. It is possible to give a change to the operation feeling of the member, and to improve the interest of the player who operates the operation member.

  In addition, as an aspect of a variable means, when a connection member is comprised so that a movement is possible, the aspect which adjusts with the position of a connection member, the aspect which adjusts with the displacement amount of an operation member, and other than an operation member and a connection member The mode etc. which adjust by the member (for example, member etc. which drive a connection member) are illustrated.

  For example, according to the aspect in which the adjustment is performed using a member other than the operation member and the connection member, the state (the state of movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member) can be understood only by touching the operation member. Attention to the operating member can be increased.

  In addition, when the connection member is configured to be movable with respect to the gaming machine body, the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member can be switched between strong and weak with the movement resistance of the connection member with respect to the gaming machine body as a boundary. The situation where the player is required to move the operating member relative to the gaming machine main body rather than moving the connecting member relative to the gaming machine body, and the operating member with respect to the connecting member, while only requiring the player to operate the operating member. It is possible to switch between a situation in which it is easier to move the connecting member relative to the gaming machine body than to move the (the difference from solidifying the push button).

  In the gaming machine I1, the connecting member is configured to be movable, and adjustment of movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the arrangement of the connecting member.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the strength of the movement resistance of the operating member relative to the connecting member is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connecting member, so that the speed at which the connecting member or operating member is operated Regardless of this, the movement resistance of the operation member relative to the connection member can be changed.

  Note that the movement resistance is adjusted by changing the arrangement of the connection members. For example, the movement resistance is changed in accordance with the amount of movement of the connection member, or the movement resistance is triggered when the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position. The mode etc. which switch are illustrated.

  The gaming machine I2 includes an urging member that generates an elastic force that urges the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member, and a wall member that is disposed so as to be able to contact the operation member. In a state where the connecting member is disposed at a predetermined position, the operation member is given a load in a first direction which is a direction opposite to the urging direction by the urging member from the wall member, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the operation member is moved.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the connection member is disposed at a predetermined position, so that the operation member comes into contact with the wall member, and the operation member is moved in the first direction. The elastic force generated from the urging member that urges the operation member that is stationary relative to is improved as compared with the case where the connecting member is disposed at a position other than the predetermined position. Therefore, the movement resistance of the operating member relative to the connecting member can be increased in a state where the connecting member is disposed at a predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine I2, the gaming machine I4 is provided with a friction member that extends along the moving direction of the operation member and rubs against the operation member in a state where the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I2, the operation member moves while rubbing against the friction member in a state where the connection member is arranged at a predetermined position, so that the operation member is rubbed from the beginning of rotation. The dynamic friction can be applied to the operation member, and the movement resistance can be changed sufficiently.

  Examples of the arrangement position of the friction member include an aspect arranged on the connection member and an aspect arranged on the main body case supporting the connection member.

  The gaming machine I4 includes a main body case that supports the connection member inside the box, and a cover member that is disposed outside the main body case, and the friction member extends from the cover member to the connection member side. A gaming machine I5 that is configured as a part to be installed.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I4, it is possible to facilitate replacement of the friction member when the friction member is worn compared to the case where the friction member is disposed on the connection member. .

  In the gaming machine I5, the friction member includes a low friction portion that gives a predetermined dynamic friction to the operation member in a rubbed state, and a high friction portion that gives a large dynamic friction compared to the low friction portion, A gaming machine I6 that is divided and arranged along the moving direction of the operation member.

  According to the gaming machine I6, it is possible to change the movement resistance of the operation member with respect to the connection member depending on whether the operation member mainly receives dynamic friction from the low friction portion or mainly receives dynamic friction from the high friction portion. Therefore, the operational feeling can be switched between two levels.

  In the gaming machine I1, the operation member includes a weight member that forms a position of the center of gravity, and adjustment of the movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the distance of the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member. A gaming machine I7 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance is adjusted by the variable means by changing the distance from the rotating shaft of the operating member to the weight member. The load applied to the operation member can be reduced as compared with the case where the movement resistance of the operation member is increased by applying a load in the direction opposite to the direction.

  In addition, since the rotational resistance in the rotational direction for lifting the weight member can be improved as viewed from the rotation shaft of the operation member, by moving the weight member, the arrangement of the weight member with respect to the rotation shaft can be reversed. The direction in which the rotational resistance becomes heavier can be reversed. Therefore, the operational feeling given to the player can be changed.

  In addition, as an aspect of moving the weight member from the rotation axis of the operation member, the inclination of the bottom surface on which the weight member is placed changes due to a change in the posture of the operation member, and the vertical relationship between both ends of the bottom surface is reversed. A mode in which the weight member moves on the bottom surface by gravity is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine I1, a driving device that generates a driving force, a transmission device configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving device to the connection member, and a resistance change member that adjusts the movement resistance of the operation member by displacement. The gaming machine I8 is characterized in that the resistance change member is displaced by a driving force of the driving device.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine I1, the movement resistance of the operation member is adjusted by displacing the resistance change member by the driving force of the driving device that drives the connecting member, so that additional driving Without the device, the movement resistance of the operating member can be adjusted without changing the appearance of the operating member and the connecting member.

  Therefore, the state of the movement resistance of the operation member can be confirmed only after the player touches it, and the value for the player of touching the operation member can be raised. Further, when the movement resistance of the operation member is changed in response to the advantageous state, it can be notified that the advantageous state has been achieved for the player in a form known only to the player who performs the operation. .

  In the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a slot machine A gaming machine J1 characterized by this. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine J2 characterized by being. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, B1 to B11, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E5, F1 to F7, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine J3 that is a fusion of a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
310, 13310, 14310, 15310, 16310, 20310 Swing operation member (part of operation member, part of input device, first moving member)
311a Insertion hole (locking part)
313d Second sensor member (detection device)
317, 13317 Lens member (part of input device, input unit, push-in member, operation unit)
330, 3330, 5330, 8330, 10330, 13330 Inner case member (part of support member, main body case)
331d1 Lever support shaft (first axis, second axis)
331d2 Eccentric cam shaft (first shaft)
333, 2333, 4333, 6333, 14333 Eccentric cam member (transmission member, eccentric cam member)
333b Cylindrical part (cylindrical part)
335 First drive device (drive device)
336, 4336, 5336, 8336, 14336 Lock member (regulator member, lock member)
338 Gear damper (braking means)
340, 2340, 3340, 4340, 7340, 9340, 13340, 18340, 19340 Lever member (part of moving member, connecting member)
350, 4350, 7350, peeling member (part of regulated member)
363 Shaft support rod (second shaft)
364 Buffer member 366 Vibration device (part of production member, vibration device)
366b Pressing member (vibrating part)
2333a Body member (rotating gear)
2333b Cam member (eccentric cam)
5336a1 Curved wall (concave part)
13312, 15312, 20312 Posture correction device (correction means, part of variable means)
13312a Contact member (second moving member)
13312b Support member 13312c Scissors member (lock member)
13322 Right front cover (cover member)
13322b, 17322b Wall member (contacted member)
14333c2 Convex portion (first convex portion)
14337 Posture switching device (switching means)
14337a Body member (part of transmission member, part of switching means)
14337b Extension part (part of transmission member)
14337b1 protruding portion (second protruding portion)
16315 Separation prevention cover (part of variable means)
16315e Iron ball (weight member)
17322b1 extended portion (part of variable means, friction member)
17362c Friction arm (part of variable means)
18347 Transmission device (part of variable means, part of resistance change member)
CS1 Vibrating coil spring (second biasing device)
CS2 Push-in coil spring (first biasing device)
M41 Electromagnet member (electromagnet)
RB rubber band (part of variable means, part of variable resistance member)
SP1, SP21, SP31, SP41, SP101 Torsion spring (first biasing member, biasing member)
SP13 Coil spring (elastic member, part of variable means)

Claims (3)

An operation member configured to be operable by a player;
A connection member that movably supports the operation member,
A gaming machine comprising variable means for changing a movement resistance when the operation member is moved in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the connecting member is configured to be movable, and adjustment of movement resistance by the variable means is performed by changing the arrangement of the connecting member. A biasing member that generates an elastic force that biases the operation member in a predetermined direction with respect to the connection member;
A wall member disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation member,
In a state where the connection member is disposed at a predetermined position, the operation member is given a load in the first direction, which is opposite to the urging direction by the urging member, from the wall member, The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the operation member is configured to be moved.

Images